Omron Marine Radio 3G3FV PDRT1 SIN User Manual

Cat. No. I525-E1-1  
USER’S MANUAL  
CompoBus/D (DeviceNet)  
Communications Card  
MODEL 3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN  
(For SYSDRIVE 3G3FV High-function General-purpose Inverters)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice:  
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified  
operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.  
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Al-  
ways heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in inju-  
ry to people or damage to property.  
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death  
!
or serious injury.  
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death  
!
!
or serious injury.  
Caution  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor  
or moderate injury, or property damage.  
OMRON Product References  
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word Unitis also capitalized when  
it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name  
of the product.  
The abbreviation Ch,which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products,  
often means wordand is abbreviated Wdin documentation in this sense.  
The abbreviation PCmeans Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation  
for anything else.  
Visual Aids  
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different  
types of information.  
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.  
OMRON, 1998  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,  
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior  
written permission of OMRON.  
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because  
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual  
is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Never-  
theless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for dam-  
ages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H Installation and Wiring Precautions  
WARNING Never touch any internal parts of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electric shock.  
!
WARNING Install, remove, or wire the Optional Card only after turning OFF the Inverter, making  
sure that all the indicators of the Inverter are OFF, and waiting for the time specified  
on the front cover of the Inverter to elapse. Not doing so may result in electric shock.  
!
WARNING Do not damage, press, or put excessive stress or heavy objects on the cables. Doing  
!
!
!
so may result in electric shock, product malfunction, or product damage.  
Caution  
Caution  
Do not touch the parts of the Optional Card by hand. Otherwise, static electricity may  
damage the Optional Card.  
Be sure that the connector of the Optional Card is firmly in place on the Inverter. Im-  
proper connection may cause injury, product malfunction, or product damage.  
H Adjustment Precautions  
Caution  
Be careful when changing settings. Not doing so may result in injury or product dam-  
age.  
!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1. Functions and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
1-2 CompoBus/D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
1-3 CompoBus/D System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
1-3-1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
1-3-2 Configurator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
1-3-3 CompoBus/D Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
1-3-4 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Chapter 2. CompoBus/D Communications Line Design . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
2-1 Network Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
2-1-1 Network Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
2-1-2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
2-2 Network Configuration Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
2-2-1 Baud Rate and Communications Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
2-2-2 Locating Terminating Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
2-3 Communications Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
2-3-1 Locating the Communications Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
2-3-2 Step 1: Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph . . . . . . . 2-9  
2-3-3 Step 2: Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
2-3-4 Step 3: Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
2-3-5 Dual Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
2-4 Communications Line Noise Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
2-4-1 Communications Line Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
2-4-2 Grounding the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
2-4-3 Communications Power Supply Noise Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16  
2-4-4 Noise Prevention Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
2-4-5 Noise Prevention for Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
Chapter 3. Setup and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
3-1 Nomenclature and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
3-1-1 Names of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
3-1-2 Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
3-1-3 Operation Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
3-1-4 Baud Rate and Node Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
3-2 Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
3-2-1 CompoBus/D Communications Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
3-2-2 Communications Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Chapter 4. CompoBus/D System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
4-1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
4-1-1 Overview and Restrictions of Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
4-1-2 Scan Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
4-1-3 Fixed Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
4-1-4 Free Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
4-2 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
4-2-1 Frequency Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
4-2-2 Inverter Run Command Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
4-2-3 CompoBus/D Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
4-2-4 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
4-3 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 5. CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations . . . . . . . 5-1  
5-1 Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
5-1-1 Standard Remote I/O (Initial Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
5-1-2 Types of Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
5-2 Message Communications (DeviceNet Explicit Messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
5-2-1 Overview of Message Communications (Explicit Message Operations) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
5-2-2 Sending and Receiving Messages with C200HX/HG/HE PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
5-2-3 SYSMAC CV-series Message Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
5-2-4 Overview of Messages and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
5-2-5 Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
5-2-6 Control Supervisor Objects: Class 29 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
5-2-7 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20  
5-3 Switching Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24  
5-4 Special Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27  
5-4-1 Overview of Special Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27  
5-4-2 Special Remote I/O Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29  
5-4-3 Inputting Control/Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30  
5-4-4 Inverter Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32  
5-4-5 Parameter Constant Reading and Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39  
Chapter 6. Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
6-1 Communications Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
6-2 Message Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
6-3 Special Remote I/O Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6  
6-4 Inverter Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Chapter 7. Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs) . . . 7-1  
7-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
7-2 Message Communications Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
7-2-1 Inverter Fault Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
7-2-2 Reading/Writing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
7-3 Special Remote I/O Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
7-3-1 Simple Operation Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
7-3-2 Reading Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
7-3-3 Writing Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22  
Chapter 8. Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
8-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
8-2 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
8-2-1 Identify Objects (Identification Information): Class 01 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
8-2-2 Message Router Objects: Class 02 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
8-2-3 DeviceNet Objects: Class 03 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
8-2-4 Assembly Objects: Class 04 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
8-2-5 DeviceNet Connection Objects: Class 05 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
8-3 CompoBus/D Communications Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
I-1  
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Chapter 1  
Functions and System  
Configuration  
1-1 Functions  
1-2 CompoBus/D Features  
1-3 CompoBus/D System Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
1-1 Functions  
The 3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN CompoBus/D Communications Card is a dedicated communications interface  
card that makes it possible for the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV High-function General-purpose Inverter to com-  
municate with SYSMAC Programmable Controllers. Installing a CompoBus/D Communications Card in  
the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter permits a Programmable Controller to monitor RUN/STOP and operat-  
ing conditions, and to make changes in set values.  
3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN  
CompoBus/D Communications Card  
H Easy Communications  
The following two functions can be used simultaneously in CompoBus/D communications between the  
CPU Unit of a SYSMAC PC and the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter.  
S Remote I/O Communications  
I/O is automatically transferred between Slaves and the CPU Unit without any special program-  
ming in the CPU Unit. (Automatically transmits Inverter control inputs such as RUN or STOP from  
a SYSMAC PC to the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter and returns operation status of the Inverter or  
output frequency monitor data. )  
S Message Communications  
Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a Master Unit is mounted  
and Slaves (SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverters) by executing specific instructions (such as CMND  
and IOWR, depending on the model of SYSMAC PC used) from the program in the CPU Unit.  
(Allows some parameter setting and monitoring, Inverter output frequency, output voltage, or  
output current. If the remote I/O communications is not performed, Inverter control data such as  
RUN or STOP can be input through this message communications function.)  
Remote I/O communications for the CompoBus/D Communications Card are performed using either 4  
or 6 words allocated in the I/O Area of the SYSMAC PC. The Inverter can be controlled using remote I/O  
communications because the basic control I/O functions, frequency setting functions, and output fre-  
quency monitoring functions are assigned to remote I/O. The allows the Inverter to be controlled  
through simple I/O processing.  
H Communications with SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE and CV-series PCs  
The CompoBus/D communications system is supported by both SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE and CV-se-  
ries Programmable Controllers. Up to twice as many Inverters can be connected in comparison to SYS-  
MAC BUS Remote I/O Systems to support even larger control systems.  
Note 1. The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the system depends on the type of  
Master Unit used, whether the message function is used, and the number of words used by  
remote I/O communications. See 1-3 CompoBus/D System Configuration for further details.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
Note 2. The SYSMAC CV Series includes the CV1000, CV2000, and CVM1 Programmable Control-  
lers. SYSMAC C200HS PCs support only remote I/O communications.  
H Multi-vendor Network  
The CompoBus/D conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification, which means that de-  
vices (Masters and Slaves) produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Network.  
The CompoBus/D Communications Card supports the DeviceNet AC/DC drive object, so that the func-  
tions available for CompoBus/D communications can be used in DeviceNet communications.  
H Choice of Communications Functions  
The CompoBus/D Communications Card has various functions to choose from to suit the Inverter ap-  
plications.  
S Remote I/O Communications  
Either basic remote I/O control or special remote I/O can be chosen for remote I/O allocation to  
suit the application. Special I/O control can be used to control and set all functions for 3G3FV-se-  
ries Inverters.  
S Message Communications  
Basic Inverter control and monitoring is possible with DeviceNet explicit messages, which are  
defined for AC/DC driver objects. Remote I/O and message communications can be used simul-  
taneously, i.e., remote I/O control can be performed at the same time as other control using mes-  
sage communications.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
H Applicable to Various System Configurations  
Remote I/O communications and message communications are available as communications func-  
tions. Normal control inputs are controlled by the remote I/O communications function. When neces-  
sary, the message communications function is used to monitor each Inverter. It is possible to control the  
selection of either the communications control input or local control input provided that the Inverter soft-  
ware version is higher than Ver. 1042.  
Note For connecting the CompoBus/D Communications Card of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin  
Cables and branch them from the T-branch Tap.  
Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions.  
As for multi-drop wiring, use Thin Cables for direct insertion. Thick Cables cannot be used for this  
kind of wiring.  
Message communications function  
C200HW-DRM21-V1 or  
CVM1-DRM21-V1 (Master Unit)  
Reading Inverter  
output current  
3G3FV-series Inverter  
Remote I/O function  
Output (PC to 3G3FV)  
Wd  
15  
to  
0
3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN  
CompoBus/D  
Communications Card  
n
Inverter run commands  
Rotational speed reference  
n+1  
Note: T-branch wiring using Thin  
Input (3G3FV to PC)  
Cables  
Switch  
Run  
Reverse  
Forward  
Stop  
Power supply  
Motor  
Selection of either the communications  
control input or local control input is  
possible using Net.Ctrol./Net.Ref.  
(Applicable to Inverter software higher  
than Ver. 1042.)  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
1-2 CompoBus/D Features  
H System Configuration Example  
Master by  
other company  
OMRON Configurator  
OMRON Master Unit  
OMRON Master Unit  
rator  
CompoBus/D Network  
Sla
OMRON Slaves  
H Multi-vendor Network  
The CompoBus/D conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification, which means that de-  
vices (Masters and Slaves) produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Network.  
Therefore, a wide range of field-level applications can be supported by combining valve devices, sen-  
sors, and other devices.  
H Simultaneous Remote I/O and Message Services  
Remote I/O communications to constantly exchange I/O data between the PC and Slaves can be  
executed simultaneously with message communications, to send/receive Master Unit data as required  
by the application. Therefore, a CompoBus/D Network can be installed to flexibly handle applications  
that require both bit data and message data. Message communications can be achieved either by using  
OMRON’s FINS commands or by using DeviceNet explicit messages.  
H Connect Multiple PCs to the Same Network  
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable connection of more than one Master to the Net-  
work, allowing message communications between PCs and between multiple groups of PCs and  
Slaves. This allows the CompoBus/D Network to be used as a common bus to unify controls while re-  
ducing wiring.  
H Handle Multi-point Control and Line Expansions with Multi-layer  
Networks  
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable mounting more than one Master Unit to a single  
PC, allowing control of many more points. This feature can easily handle line expansions and other ap-  
plications.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
H Free Remote I/O Allocation  
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable flexible allocation of I/O, i.e., in any area and in  
any order. This allows I/O allocations that suit the application to simplify programming and enable effec-  
tive usage of PC memory areas.  
H Handle Slaves with Different Response Speeds  
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to set the communications cycle time, enabling usage of  
Slaves with slow response times.  
H Easily Expand or Change Lines with Various Connection Methods  
Use a multi-drop trunk line, T-branch multi-drop lines, or daisy-chain drop lines. All three connection  
methods can be combined to flexibly construct a Network that meets the needs of the application.  
Note For connecting the CompoBus/D Communications Card of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin  
Cables and branch them from the T-branch Tap.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
1-3 CompoBus/D System Configuration  
1-3-1 System Configuration  
CompoBus/D is a multi-bit, multi-vendor network that combines controls and data on a machine/line-  
control level and that conforms to DeviceNet open field network specifications.  
Two types of communications are supported: 1) Remote I/O communications that automatically trans-  
fer I/O between Slaves and the CPU Unit of a SYSMAC PC without any special programming in the CPU  
Unit and 2) Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a Master Unit is  
mounted and Slaves by executing specific instructions (such as CMND and IOWR, depending on the  
model of SYSMAC PC used) from the program in the CPU Unit.  
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable following. This allows the support of an even  
larger control system.  
S I/O area words can be flexibly allocated for remote I/O communications.  
S More than one Master Unit can be mounted to a single PC.  
S More than one Master Unit can be connected in a single Network.  
H Fixed Allocation: Configuration without a Configurator  
C200HW-DRM21-V1 or CVM1-DRM21-V1  
CompoBus/D Master Unit  
V  
ons Card  
CV-series PCs:  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs:  
C200HS PCs:  
64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)  
64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)  
33 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)  
Note 1. The Master Unit occupies one node of the CompoBus/D Network.  
Note 2. If C200HS PCs are used, only remote I/O communications are possible.  
Note 3. If one node uses more than one word, the maximum number of nodes will be reduced by one  
node for each extra word that is used.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
H Free Allocation: Configuration with a Configurator  
C200HW-DRM21-V1 or CVM1-DRM21-V1  
CompoBus/D Master Unit  
3G8F5-DRM21 (ISA Board)  
M21 (PC Card)  
r  
G3FV Inverter  
ns Card  
64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)  
Note 1. The Master Unit and Configurator each occupy one node of the CompoBus/D Network.  
Note 2. If C200HS PCs are used, only remote I/O communications are possible.  
Note 3. The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the Network will be limited by the  
maximum number of control points of the PC used.  
1-3-2 Configurator Overview  
The Configurator is software application run on an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer and is used to  
support a CompoBus/D communications system. OMRON provides interfaces (hardware) for connect-  
ing computers to the CompoBus/D Network. The Configurator occupies one node on the CompoBus/D  
Network, but has no specific functions on the network itself. The Configurator provides the following  
functions.  
S Free Allocation of Remote I/O  
The remote I/O allocations in the PCs can be changed from the Configurator. I/O can be flexibly  
allocated for each node within the specified I/O areas.  
S More than One Master Unit per Network  
Slaves can be set for each Master Unit from the Configurator enabling communications between  
multiple groups of PCs and Slaves. The maximum number of nodes connected to one Network  
remains at 64. One Slave can be connected to no more than one Master Unit.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
S More than one Master Unit per PC  
Remote I/O can be allocated for each Slave of the Master Unit from the Configurator, so more  
than one Master Unit can be mounted to the same PC.  
Note In allocating Remote I/O for each Master Unit, be careful not to allow any dual allocation.  
H Configurator Specifications  
Item  
Personal computer  
Components  
3G8F5-DRM21  
3G8E2-DRM21  
Notebook model  
Desktop model  
Installation disk (software)  
Dedicated ISA Board  
Installation disk (software)  
Dedicated PMCIA Card  
CompoBus/D Interface Unit  
Operating  
environment  
Hardware  
Computer:  
CPU:  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
With Windows 95: 66 MHz i486 DX2 min.  
With Windows NT: 90 MHz Pentium min.  
Memory:  
With Windows 95: 12 MB min. (16 MB or more recommended)  
With Windows NT: 16 MB min. (24 MB or more recommended)  
Hard disk:  
5 MB min. free space  
OS  
Windows 95 or Windows NT 3.51/4.0 Windows 95  
CompoBus/D Dedicated ISA Board  
interface  
Dedicated PMCIA Card  
CompoBus/D Interface Unit  
Relation to Network  
Operates as one node on the Network, requires one node address, and only  
one Configurator can be connected to the Network. (The Configurator can be  
disconnected from the Network after remote I/O has been allocated.)  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
1-3-3 CompoBus/D Communications Specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Communications protocol  
DeviceNet  
Supported connections (commu- Master-Slave: Remote I/O and explicit messages  
nications)  
Peer-to-peer: FINS messages  
Both conform to DeviceNet specifications.  
Connection forms  
Combination of multi-drop and T-branch connections (for trunk and drop  
lines)  
Baud rate  
500 Kbps, 250 Kbps, or 125 Kbps (switchable)  
Communications media  
Special 5-wire cables (2 signal lines, 2 power lines, and 1 shield line)  
Thick Cable:  
Thin Cable:  
DCA2-5C10 (100 m)  
DCA1-5C10 (100 m)  
Communications  
distances  
500 Kbps  
250 Kbps  
125 Kbps  
Network length:  
Drop line length:  
Total drop line length: 39 m max.  
100 m max.  
6 m max.  
Network length:  
Drop line length:  
Total drop line length: 78 m max.  
250 m max.  
6 m max.  
Network length:  
Drop line length:  
500 m max.  
6 m max.  
Total drop line length: 156 m max.  
Communications power supply  
24 VDC $1%, supplied externally  
(Slave power supply: 11 to 25 VDC)  
Recommended power supply: OMRON S82H Series or S82J Series  
Max. number of nodes  
Max. number of Masters  
64 nodes  
Without Configurator:  
With Configurator:  
1
63  
Max. number of Slaves  
Error control  
Without Configurator: 63  
With Configurator:  
63  
CRC check  
1-3-4 Inverter  
The maximum number of Inverters that can be connected to one Network depends on the PC model  
that is used, the remote I/O functions of the Inverter, and whether message communications are used or  
not. (Use the message communications function for setting some parameters and for monitoring the  
output current.) The differences between models are provided in the following tables.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
H Communications without Configurator: Fixed Allocation  
Applicable PC  
Master Unit  
CV Series  
CVM1-DRM21-V1  
C200HX/HG/HE  
C200HS  
C200HW-DRM21-V1  
Supported communica-  
tions  
Remote I/O and messages  
Remote I/O and mes-  
sages  
Remote I/O  
Max. No. of Slaves per  
Master Unit  
63  
50  
32  
Max. No. of controlled  
points per Master Unit  
2,048  
1,600  
1,024  
Allocation areas  
OUT: CIO 1900 to CIO 1963 OUT: IR 050 to IR 099  
IN: CIO 2000 to CIO 2063 IN: IR 350 to IR 399  
OUT: IR 50 to IR 81  
IN: IR 350 to IR 381  
Allocation method  
Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node address or-  
der only.  
8-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word  
16-point Slaves:Allocated 1 word  
Slaves with more than 16 points: Allocated multiple words  
Max. No.  
of  
Inverters  
Without ex-  
plicit mes-  
sages  
4 words remote I/O: 32  
6 words remote I/O: 21  
4 words remote I/O: 25 4 words remote I/O: 16  
6 words remote I/O: 16 6 words remote I/O: 10  
With explicit  
messages  
4 words remote I/O: 32  
6 words remote I/O: 21  
4 words remote I/O: 25  
6 words remote I/O: 16  
H Communications with Configurator: Free Allocation  
Applicable PC  
Master Unit  
Supported communications  
CV-series  
C200HX/HG/HE  
C200HS  
Remote I/O  
63  
CVM1-DRM21-V1 C200HW-DRM21-V1  
Remote I/O and  
messages  
Remote I/O and mes-  
sages  
Max. No of Slaves per Mas- 63  
ter Unit  
63  
Max. No. of controlled points 6,400 (100 words  
Without messages:  
4,800  
1,280 (total of 4 blocks)  
per Master Unit  
  4 blocks)  
With messages: 1,600  
Allocation areas  
Core I/O Area:  
CIO 0000 to  
CIO 2555  
IR Area 1: IR 000 to IR 235  
IR Area 2: IR 300 to IR 511  
CIO 0000 to  
CIO 2427 for  
CV500/CVM1-CPU  
01(-Vj)  
CPU Bus Link  
Area:  
HR Area: HR 00 to HR 99  
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63  
G008 to G255  
DM Area:  
D00000 to  
D24575  
DM Area:  
DM 0000 to DM 5999  
DM Area:  
DM 0000 to DM 5999  
DM 0000 to DM 4095  
D00000 to  
for C200HE-CPU11 (-Z)  
D08191 for  
CV500/CVM1-CPU  
01 (-Vj)  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functions and System Configuration  
Chapter 1  
Applicable PC  
Allocation method  
CV-series  
C200HX/HG/HE  
C200HS  
Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order  
using the Configurator.  
The following limitations apply:  
The allocation areas are in 4 blocks (OUT 1, OUT 2, IN 1, and  
IN 2). Each block consists of sequential words.  
100 words max. per block.  
For Slaves with more than 8 points, the first byte cannot be  
specified in leftmost bits (7 to 15).  
Words are allocated to Slaves as follows:  
8-point Slaves: Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of 1 word  
16-point Slaves:Allocated 1 word  
Slaves with more than 16-points: Allocated multiple words (For Slaves  
with an odd number of bytes, the last byte will be the rightmost byte)  
Max. No. of  
Inverters  
(using one  
Master Unit  
only)  
Without ex-  
plicit mes-  
sages  
63  
4 remote I/O words: 63 4 words remote I/O: 20  
6 remote I/O words: 50 6 words remote I/O: 13  
With explicit  
messages  
63  
4 remote I/O words: 25  
6 remote I/O words: 16  
---  
Max. No. Inverters with more Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the  
than one Master Unit  
number of words allocated to the Inverters (4 or 6 words).  
Note 1. The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit, so it cannot be allo-  
cated for remote I/O for Inverters.  
Note 2. If the CPU Bus Link is used with a CV-series PC, the CPU Bus  
Link Area will be used for the CPU Bus Link Therefore, the CPU  
Bus Link Area cannot be allocated to Inverters if the CPU Bus  
Link is used.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Chapter 2  
CompoBus/D  
Communications Line  
Design  
2-1 Network Configuration Overview  
2-2 Network Configuration Restrictions  
2-3 Communications Power Supply  
2-4 Communications Line Noise Prevention  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
2-1 Network Configuration Overview  
The following diagram shows the configuration of a CompoBus/D Network.  
Terminating Resistors  
are connected at each  
end of the trunk line.  
Terminating Resistors  
are connected at each  
end of the trunk line.  
CompoBus/D  
Communications  
power supply  
cables are used.  
24 VDC  
Power Supply Tap  
Trunk  
line  
or T-branch Tap  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
M
M
T
T
T-branch  
Tap  
T
T
T
T-branch  
T-branch  
T-branch  
T-branch  
Tap  
Node  
Node  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
Drop line  
Drop line  
T-branch Tap  
CompoBus/D  
cables are used.  
M
M
Node  
Drop line  
Node  
Drop line  
Drop line  
Drop line  
Node  
T
Drop line  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
M
T: T-branch connection  
M: Multi-drop connection  
Node  
CompoBus/D cables (5-wire cables) are  
used for the trunk lines and drop lines.  
2-1-1 Network Components  
H Nodes  
There are two kinds of nodes on a CompoBus/D Network: The Master and Slaves. The Slaves connect  
to external I/O and the Master administers the Network and manages the external I/O of the Slaves. The  
Master and Slaves can be connected at any location in the Network, as shown in the preceding diagram.  
H Trunk/Drop Lines  
The trunk line refers to the cable that has Terminating Resistors on both ends. Cables branching from  
the trunk line are known as drop lines. The trunk line length does not necessarily coincide with the maxi-  
mum length of the Network. CompoBus/D communications are transmitted through 5-wire cables. The  
cables come in thick and thin versions.  
H Connection Methods  
Two methods can be used to connect CompoBus/D nodes: The T-branch method and the multi-drop  
method. With the T-branch method, the node is connected to a drop line created with a T-branch Tap.  
With the multi-drop method, the node is directly connected to the trunk line or the drop line. Secondary  
branches can be made from a drop line. Both of these connection methods can be used in the same  
Network.  
H Terminating Resistors  
Terminating Resistors are connected at each end of the trunk line to reduce signal reflection and stabi-  
lize communications. There are two kinds of Terminating Resistors available: One that is provided with  
a T-branch Tap and a Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. Use a CompoBus/D Cable when connecting  
a Terminal-block Terminating Resistor.  
H Communications Power Supplies  
To use CompoBus/D, connect a communications power supply to the communications connector of  
each node with a 5-wire cable. Basically, a communications power supply, internal circuit power supply,  
and I/O power supply must be provided separately.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
2-1-2 Connections  
Chapter 2  
H Trunk and Drop Lines  
The trunk line is a cable to which Terminating Resistors are connected at the ends. Drop lines are cables  
that branch from the trunk lines. A special 5-wire cable is used for both the trunk lines and the drop lines.  
H Branching Patterns  
Branching Patterns from Trunk Line  
1.One drop line from  
trunk line  
2.Three drop lines (maximum)  
from trunk line  
3.Node connected directly to  
trunk line  
Multi-drop  
Trunk line  
Trunk line Trunk line  
T-branch Tap  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
T-branch Tap  
Node  
Drop line  
T-branch Tap  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Branching Patterns from Drop Line  
4 One drop line from  
drop line  
5.Three drop lines (maximum)  
from drop line  
6.Node connected directly to  
drop line  
Multi-drop  
Trunk line  
Trunk line Trunk line  
T-branch Tap  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
T-branch Tap  
Node  
Drop line  
T-branch Tap  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Various forms of connection can be used on the same Network, as shown in the  
following diagram. Any number of nodes up to 63 can be connected onto a single  
drop line.  
If a C200HX/HG/HE or a C200HS PC is being used without a Configurator to  
allocate remote I/o, the maximum number of nodes that can be connected to a  
single drop line is 51 for C200HX/HG/HE PCs and 33 for C200HS PCs.  
Note Design the Inverter wiring for T-branch wiring purposes using Thin  
Cables.  
Communications  
power supply  
24 VDC  
Trunk line  
Trunk line  
Power Supply Tap  
or T-branch Tap  
Terminating  
Resistor  
Terminating  
Resistor  
Node  
Node  
Drop line  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Drop  
line  
Drop  
line  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
2-2 Network Configuration Restrictions  
CompoBus/D communications are designed to meet a wide range of applications by providing a choice  
of baud rates and allowing different combinations of T-branch and multi-drop connections. The restric-  
tions of CompoBus/D communications that are required to enable the various communications possibi-  
lities are described here.  
2-2-1 Baud Rate and Communications Distance  
The maximum length of the CompoBus/D communications cables is restricted by the baud rate and the  
type of cable used. The three types of restrictions on CompoBus/D communications cable length are as  
follows:  
S Maximum network length  
S Drop line length  
S Total drop line length  
Be sure to design and configure a Network that meets the conditions provided below to ensure reli-  
able communications.  
H Maximum Communications Distance  
Maximum network length  
Baud rate  
Drop line length  
Total drop line  
length  
Thick Cable Thin Cable  
500 kbps  
100 m max.  
250 m max.  
500 m max.  
100 m max.  
100 m max.  
100 m max.  
6 m max.  
6 m max.  
6 m max.  
39 m max.  
78 m max.  
156 m max.  
250 kbps  
125 kbps  
Note Thick Cable (5-wire): DCA2-5C10 (100 m)  
Thin Cable (5-wire): DCA1-5C10 (100 m)  
H Maximum Network Length  
The length of the Network is longest at either the distance between the two most distant nodes or at the  
distance between the Terminating Resistors.  
There are two types of cables: Thick Cables and Thin Cables. The cable thickness affects signal deteri-  
oration. The maximum length of the Network therefore depends on the type of cable used as shown in  
the previous table.  
The following restrictions apply to Networks in which both Thick and Thin Cables are combined.  
Baud rate  
Maximum Network length  
Thick Cable length + Thin Cable length x 100 m  
Thick Cable length + 2.5   Thin Cable length x 250 m  
Thick Cable length + 5.0   Thin Cable length x 500 m  
500 kbps  
250 kbps  
125 kbps  
H Drop Line Length  
The length of the drop line is measured from the point in the trunk line where the original branch was  
made to the end of the branch. The maximum length of a drop line is 6 m. It is possible to make a second-  
ary branch from a drop line.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
H Total Drop Line Length  
The total drop line length is the total sum length of all the drop lines (but not including the trunk line). Do  
not exceed the maximum total drop line length (even when the length of each individual drop line is 6 m  
or less). The standard for the total drop line length varies with the baud rate as shown in the previous  
table.  
H Configuration Example  
The following configuration example shows the maximum length of the Network, the drop line lengths,  
and the total drop line length.  
Trunk line  
10 m  
Trunk line  
10 m  
Trunk line  
20m  
Terminating  
Resistor  
Terminating  
Resistor  
2 m  
2 m  
3 m  
6 m  
Node  
Node  
2 m  
Node  
1 m  
Node  
Node  
1 m  
1 m  
Node  
2 m  
2 m  
6 m  
6 m  
6 m  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Drop line  
2m  
Drop line  
5 m  
Drop line  
6 m  
Drop line  
6 m  
Maximum Network  
Length  
The longest distance between nodes is 48 m, and the distance between the two  
Terminating Resistors is 40 m. The maximum Network length is therefore 48 m.  
Drop Line Length  
There are four branch points in the trunk line. The length of each drop line is  
shown in the diagram. The maximum drop line length is 6 m.  
Total Drop Line Length  
The sum of all the drop lines is 40 m.  
2-2-2 Locating Terminating Resistors  
Be sure to connect the Terminating Resistors at both ends of the trunk line to reduce signal reflection  
and stabilize communications.  
When there is a T-branch Tap 6 m or less from the end of the trunk line (or the node):  
A Terminating Resistor attached to a T-branch Tap can easily be mounted without taking up much  
space.  
When there is not a T-branch Tap 6 meters or less from the end of the trunk line (or the node):  
A Terminating Resistor must be connected before that point. Either a T-branch Tap mounted to a  
Terminating Resistor or a terminal block with Terminating Resistor can be used. In this case, be sure  
to make the cable length 1 m or less from the node to the Terminating Resistor.  
1 m or less  
Truck line  
T-branch Tap mounted to a Terminating Resistor  
or a terminal block with Terminating Resistor.  
Node  
Node at end of trunk line  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
2-3 Communications Power Supply  
2-3-1 Locating the Communications Power Supply  
H Basic Concept  
The communications power supply must be 24 VDC.  
Make sure that the power is supplied from the trunk line.  
When providing power to several nodes from one power supply, if possible try to locate the nodes in  
both directions from the power supply.  
Provide power through Power Supply Taps. It is, however, possible to use T-branch Taps instead when  
there is one communications power supply in the system and the total current consumption is less  
than 5 A.  
The power supply capacity for cables is restricted to 8 A for Thick Cables and 3 A for Thin Cables.  
A single Network is usually supplied by one power supply. It is, however, possible to have more than  
one power supply when power supply specifications cannot be met with a single power supply. (See  
2-3-4 Step 3: Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies.)  
Fully consider the power supply capacity allowance in the design.  
If the power supply is switched OFF during the operation of the Network, there may be a malfunction in  
the nodes.  
The current capacity of the drop line varies according to its length. The longer the drop line, the lower  
its maximum capacity becomes. This is the same whether the cable is thick or thin. Calculate the cur-  
rent capacity passing through the drop line I (the total current consumption at the drop line) using the  
following formula.  
I = 4.57/L  
I:  
Permissible current (A)  
L:  
Length of the drop line (m)  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
H Flowchart  
Use the flowchart below to determine the communications power supply on the trunk line. Satisfy the  
conditions for each drop line on page 2-6.  
Provisionally determine the  
location of the power supply.  
Step 1  
Determine the best location of the  
power supply from the graphs.  
No  
Are the power supply  
specifications met?  
Consider changing the  
location of the power supply.  
Yes  
Consider using Thick Cable.  
No  
Are the power supply  
specifications met?  
Step 2  
Calculate the best location  
of the actual nodes.  
Yes  
No  
Are the power supply  
specifications met?  
Consider changing the location of  
the power supply.  
Yes  
Consider using Thick Cable.  
Consider changing the location of  
high current consumption nodes.  
No  
Are the power supply  
specifications met?  
Step 3  
Split the power supply  
system by installing more  
than two power supplies.  
Yes  
Set the location for  
the power supply.  
H Power Supply Location Patterns  
The power supply can be located in the configurations shown below. Basically, select from the configu-  
rations 1 and 2.  
Consider using configuration 3 when power supply specifications cannot be met by configurations 1  
and 2. It is possible to use configuration 4 for a duplex power supply.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
1 Locating the Nodes on Both Sides of the Power Supply  
Power Supply Tap  
or T-branch Tap  
Communications  
power supply  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
2 Locating the Nodes on One Side of the Power Supply  
Note Configuration 1 is recommended for a single power supply to several nodes.  
Power Supply Tap  
or T-branch Tap  
Communications  
power supply  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
3 Splitting the Power Supply System with Multiple Power Supplies  
System 1  
System 2  
Special Power Supply Tap  
Special Power Supply Tap  
Communications  
power supply  
Communications  
power supply  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Remove the fuse  
and split +V.  
fuse  
V+  
Make V the same for  
Systems 1 and 2.  
V–  
24 V 0 V  
4 Duplex Power Supply with Multiple Power Supplies  
Special Power  
Supply Tap  
Special Power  
Supply Tap  
Communications  
power supply  
Communications  
power supply  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Note 1. If power supply specifications cannot be met with a single power supply when the current ca-  
pacity of the Thick Cable exceeds 8 A even after the power supply location is modified, use  
more than one communications power supply.  
Note 2. In configuration 1, the power can be supplied in two directions to the trunk line as long as the  
current capacity of each is 8 A or less when using Thick Cable, i.e., it is possible to have a  
configuration with a total maximum current capacity of up to 16 A.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
Note 3. Consider changing to Thick Cable to meet specifications if the current capacity of the Thin  
Cable exceeds 3 A when using Thin Cable for the trunk line.  
H Setting the Power Supply Location  
Determine whether or not the current can be supplied normally by finding the current capacity required  
by each node and the voltage drop in the cables to be used to provide power. Calculate the values below  
in advance.  
The current capacity required by each node  
The distance between the power supply and each node  
The current capacity of the 3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN CompoBus/D Communications Card is approximately  
20 mA.  
H Calculating the Power Supply Location  
There are two methods to find the best location of the communications power supply on the trunk line.  
Simple calculation from a graph  
Calculation by formula (Calculating the voltage drop from resistance and current consumption of the  
communications cables).  
Each drop line must satisfy the equation on page 2-6, which represents the relationship between the  
drop line length and the current capacity for the drop line.  
Note 1. From the graph, a hypothetical power supply location can be determined if the conditions cal-  
culated in the graph are met by estimating the worst configuration (that has the maximum volt-  
age drop as shown in the diagram below).  
Node  
Node  
Node  
Communications  
power supply  
Node  
Note 2. Even if the power supply specifications cannot be met using the graph, the conditions can be  
met and a hypothetical power supply location determined by using the formula.  
Note 3. When the communications power supply and the internal circuit supply are the same, use the  
formula to calculate a hypothetical power supply location because it cannot be determined by  
using the graph.  
2-3-2 Step 1: Determining the Best Location for the Power  
Supply from a Graph  
A voltage drop occurs when a current flows through a communications cable. The longer the commu-  
nications cable and the larger the current, the greater the voltage drop. The communications power  
supply at each node must be 11 VDC or more. To ensure the correct power supply, the relationship is  
plotted as shown in the following graph to find the maximum current that satisfies the voltage of the  
communications power supply at different trunk line lengths even if there is a voltage drop due to cable  
resistance.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
H Thick Cable  
Distance (m)  
0
25  
50  
100  
150  
200  
250  
300  
350  
400  
450  
500  
Max. current (A)  
8.00 8.00 5.42 2.93 2.01 1.53 1.23 1.03 0.89 0.78 0.69 0.63  
8
7
6
5
Max. current (A)  
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance (m)  
H Thin Cable  
Distance (m)  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
1.26  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
Max. current (A)  
3.00  
3.00  
3.00  
2.06  
1.57  
1.06  
0.91  
0.80  
0.71  
0.64  
3
2
Max. current (A)  
1
0
0
Distance (m)  
H Determining the Best Location of the Power Supply from a Graph  
Verify the Items 1 to 3 below for each node located in the same direction viewed from the power supply.  
Therefore, if nodes are located on both sides of the power supply, these items must be verified for all  
nodes located in each direction.  
1 Find A, the total current consumption of all the nodes to which communications power is to be sup-  
plied.  
2 Using the graph compute B, the maximum current flow in each cable from the power supply to the  
end of the trunk line according to the types of cables (Thick Cables or Thin Cables).  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
3 Compare the values found in steps 1 and 2, above. If the first value (A) is less than the second (B),  
this shows that power supply specifications are met and power can be supplied to all nodes at any  
point in the Network.  
Note Be sure to refer to the correct graph as the maximum current flow is different for Thick and Thin  
Cables.  
H Countermeasures  
If the second value (B) is less than the first (A), use the following procedure to locate the communica-  
tions power supply.  
Locate the communications power supply in the center of the Network and the nodes to both sides of it.  
If the nodes are already located at both sides of the power supply, move the power supply in the direc-  
tion that requires the larger current capacity.  
If Thin Cable is being used, replace it with Thick Cable.  
Note If, after following the above procedure, B is still less than A, go to Step 2 and determine the actual  
position of the nodes by the formula calculation method.  
D Calculation Example  
The following example shows a Network that requires power to be supplied for 240 m on Thick Cable.  
The power supply is located in the center of the Network. Because the power supply is in the center, the  
maximum current will flow both to the left and to the right, enabling the supply of at least twice the maxi-  
mum current as when the power supply is placed on the end of the Network. The current consumption  
for individual nodes is as follows:  
Terminating Resistor  
Trunk line  
(5-wire cable)  
Trunk line  
(5-wire cable)  
Terminating Resistor  
3 m max.  
Communications  
power supply  
Node  
0.1 A  
Node  
Node  
0.2 A  
Node  
Node  
Node  
0.15 A  
0.25 A  
0.15 A  
0.25 A  
120 m  
120 m  
Trunk line  
Power supply cable  
Total power supply length on left = Total power supply length on right = 120 m  
Total current consumption on left: 0.1 + 0.25 + 0.2 = 0.55 A  
Total current consumption on right: 0.15 + 0.25 + 0.15 = 0.55 A  
Maximum current for the left side of the Thick Cable (see previous table) = approx. 2.5 A  
Maximum current for the right side of the Thick Cable (see previous table) = approx. 2.5 A  
(using straight line approximation between 100 to 150 m)  
2-3-3 Step 2: Calculating the Best Location of the Actual  
Nodes  
Go to Step 2 if the best location for the power supply according to the specifications cannot be deter-  
mined from the graphs. The second method calculates the best location for each actual node and does  
not estimate the worst possible configuration for the power supply.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
Basically, in the CompoBus/D Network the permissible maximum voltage drop within the system can be  
specified at 5 V for a power supply line (+V or V), by calculating the specifications for the voltage of the  
communications power supply (24 VDC) and the input voltage of the communications power supply of  
each device (11 to 25 VDC).  
Of the permissible 5-V maximum voltage drop within the system, the permissible voltage drop is 4.65 V  
in the trunk lines and 0.35 V in the drop lines.  
The following formulae are applicable when power is supplied independently for communications  
and the internal circuit. For details on voltage drop and formulae when the communications power  
supply and internal circuit power supply are shared, refer to the CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) Opera-  
tion Manual.  
H Formulae  
Try to calculate the best location for each node using the formula below. If the best location for each  
node can be determined using the formula, the specifications for the power supply to each node can  
also be met. Do not exceed the maximum current capacity of the cable (Thick Cable: 8 A and Thin  
Cable: 3 A).  
{(L1 × RC + N1 × 0.005) × l1} + {(L2 × RC + N2 × 0.005) × l2} + ..... + {(Ln × RC + Nn × 0.005) × ln} x 4.65 V  
Li:  
The distance (m) of the trunk line between the power supply and node i.  
Rc:  
Maximum cable resistance for approx. 1 m  
(Thick Cable: 0.015 /m, Thin Cable: 0.069 /m)  
Ni:  
Ii:  
The number of T-branch Taps on the trunk line between the power supply and node i.  
The consumption current required for the communications power supply for node i.  
0.005 = The contact resistance of the T-branch Taps.  
Note If there are nodes on both sides of the power supply, the formula is used to calculate the best  
location in each direction, and if the conditions are satisfied, then the locations are valid. The  
conditions are satisfied if the following equations are true.  
Voltage drop (V) on trunk line at left side x 4.65 V  
Voltage drop (V) on trunk line at right side x 4.65 V  
D Calculation Example  
Terminating Resistor  
Trunk line  
(5-wire cable)  
Trunk line  
(5-wire cable)  
Terminating Resistor  
3 m  
max.  
Communications  
power supply  
Node  
Node  
Node  
0.2 A  
Node  
Node  
Node  
0.1 A  
0.25 A  
0.15 A  
0.25 A  
0.15 A  
40 m  
40 m  
40 m  
40 m  
40 m  
40 m  
Left Side Equation  
Node 1:  
Node 2:  
Node 3:  
(120  0.015 + 3   0.005)   0.1 = 0.1815 (V)  
(80  0.015 + 2   0.005)   0.25 = 0.3025 (V)  
(40  0.015 + 1   0.005)   0.2 = 0.121 (V)  
If 0.1815 + 0.3025 + 0.121 = 0.605 V x 4.65 V, the conditions are satisfied.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
Right Side Calculation  
Node 4:  
Node 5:  
Node 6:  
(40  0.015 + 1   0.005)   0.15 = 0.09075 (V)  
(80  0.015 + 2   0.005)   0.25 = 0.3025 (V)  
(120  0.015 + 3   0.005)   0.15 = 0.27225 (V)  
If 0.09075 + 0.3025 + 0.27225 = 0.6655 V x 4.65 V, the conditions are satisfied.  
2-3-4 Step 3: Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies  
Go to Step 3 if the best location for the nodes cannot be calculated from the formulae. In the third step,  
there are multiple power supplies and the power supply system is split.  
H Splitting the Power Supply System  
Be sure to use a Power Supply Tap for each power supply when the Network is supplied by two or more  
power supplies.  
Remove the fuses in the Power Supply Tap to split the power supply system.  
Once the power supply system is split, return to Step 1 or 2, and determine the best location of the nodes  
in each system.  
H Power Supply Tap Configuration  
Connector C  
Model  
1485T-R2T5-T5  
Specification Power supply tap  
(with a grounding  
terminal and reverse  
current prevention  
function )  
supply cable  
Manufacturer Allen-Bradley  
C
B  
Connector A Connector B  
H Internal Circuitry of the Power Supply Tap  
Power Supply Tap  
Fuse A  
Fuse B  
V+  
CAN H  
Shield  
CAN L  
V–  
V+  
CAN H  
5-wire cables  
on side A  
5-wire cables  
on side B  
Shield  
CAN L  
V–  
Schottky  
diode  
Fuses used:  
Littel fuse 312008  
Rated amperage: 8 A  
Rated voltage: 250 V  
6.35 Φ x 31.75 mm  
VV+  
Ground  
terminal  
Power supply device on side C  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
2-3-5 Dual Power Supplies  
Because diodes are contained in Power Supply Taps, these taps can be used to construct a dual power  
supply system in the Network. Dual power supply differs from parallel operation of power supplies, so  
the following restrictions apply.  
H Restrictions  
Dual power supply is basically used to ensure backup power supply, not parallel operation of power  
supplies. Therefore, each power supply to be used must meet the power allocation specifications (i.e.,  
must satisfy steps 1 and 2).  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
2-4 Communications Line Noise Prevention  
2-4-1 Communications Line Noise  
The communications line sends and receives high-speed pulse signals, and checks whether the data is  
correct by checking the sequence of the signals. If the amount of noise on the communications line is too  
great, the interference will alter the communications signal data, and communications will be impossi-  
ble. Communications lines are more sensitive and require higher speeds than normal I/O lines, so be  
sure that noise does not interfere with communications. Use the preventative noise countermeasures  
described here when configuring the system to ensure smooth system start up.  
2-4-2 Grounding the Network  
H Grounding the Network  
The CompoBus/D Network must be grounded at only one location so that a ground loop is not created.  
The ground should also be connected as close as possible to the center of the Network. Connect the  
cable shield to the ground terminal on the communications power supply and then connect to a ground  
of 100 max., as shown in the following diagram.  
Power Supply Tap  
V+  
V+  
CAN H  
Shield  
CAN L  
V–  
CAN H  
Shield  
Communications  
cable  
CAN L  
V–  
V–  
V+  
Ground  
terminal  
FG VV+  
Communications  
power supply  
Ground (100 max.)  
If more than one communications power supply is connected to the same Network, ground only the one  
nearest the center of the Network. Do not connect the shield wire at the other power supplies.  
Note 1. Always ground the communications cable shield at one and only one location in the Network.  
Note 2. Always ground to 100 or less.  
Note 3. Always use a separate ground. Never use the same ground as for Inverters or other drive  
system devices.  
H Grounding the CompoBus/D Communications Card  
The CompoBus/D Communications Card should be grounded according to DeviceNet recommenda-  
tions installing a noise filter as shown in the following diagram. The ground is normally wired to the  
ground terminal (12 (G)).  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
Note If the cable grounded to the Inverter is not sufficient and is receiving noise interference, discon-  
nect the grounding cable.  
Shield  
2-4-3 Communications Power Supply Noise Prevention  
The communications power supply is the most important power supply in a CompoBus/D Network. The  
following measures will prevent noise in the communications power supply.  
Use the recommended power supply (S82H/S82J) for communications.  
Use an independent power supply for communications.  
Make sure to install a noise filter on the primary AC input side of the communications power supply.  
Always use a control system power supply for the primary AC side of the communications power sup-  
ply that is not shared with power devices, such as Inverters or motors.  
If noise interference remains in cables for which noise countermeasures have been implemented, the  
following countermeasures may be effective.  
D Communications Cable Shielding  
Suspend the communications cable shielding wire without grounding it. This will filter the noise that  
flows from the ground to the communications cable and will filter the noise current that flows in the  
shielding wire.  
D Communications Power Supply  
Suspend the communications power supply without grounding it. This will also filter the noise that flows  
from the communications power supply ground to the communications cable or the noise current that  
flows in the shielding wire. The switching power supply is usually connected to the case and the capaci-  
tor as shown below. The ground (FG) terminal must be suspended and the control panel for the power  
supply itself must be insulated.  
Switching Power Supply Configuration  
Switching power supply  
Power  
supply  
circuit  
AC power supply  
AC input  
DC output  
Casing  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
Suspending the Communications Power Supply  
S82J power supply  
DC power supply  
Insulating material (such as  
baked board or acrylic board)  
S82Y-jjN (Mounting Tool)  
When using S82J power supply  
When using other power supplies  
2-4-4 Noise Prevention Wiring  
To prevent inductive noise, do not wire the communications line, SYSMAC power lines, and other power  
lines near to each other. Keep the power lines for Inverters, motors, regulators, and contactors, the  
communications lines, and the SYSMAC power lines separated from each other by at least 300 mm.  
Also, provide separate conduits or ducts for the communications lines and power lines.  
Low-voltage cable  
Suspended duct  
Floor duct  
Communication
SYSMAC I/O L
SYSMAC P
General con
ns line  
ine  
Ground (100 max.)  
Do not install communications lines and SYSMAC power lines onto the control panel on which high-  
voltage devices are mounted.  
Because noise currents flow through metallic equipment (such as casings), the communications  
cables should be placed as far away from metallic equipment as possible.  
Ground the shielding wire on the communications cable at one point.  
If the same ground is used for the communications cables and communications power supply, there is  
a possibility that noise may be transmitted through the ground line to the communications line. In order  
to avoid this, be sure that the power line ground and the grounds for the communications cables and  
the communications power supply are located as far from each other as possible.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Line Design  
Chapter 2  
2-4-5 Noise Prevention for Peripheral Devices  
Install surge suppressors on devices that generate noise, particularly devices that have an inductive  
component such as motors, transformers, solenoids, and magnetic coils.  
Surge suppressor  
(Installed next to device)  
Surge suppressor  
(Installed next to device)  
DC input type  
Device  
(such as a motor)  
AC input type  
Device  
(such as a motor)  
If a surge suppressor does not fit on the device, installing a ferrite core directly next to the devices  
contactors, such as a contactor may be effective.  
Device  
(such as a motor)  
Ferrite core 0443-1641151  
Nisshin Electric Co, Ltd.  
Insert a line filter on the primary side of the communications power supply.  
When there are two or more communications power supplies, the communications power cables can  
be grounded by simply connecting a single Power Supply Tap near the center of the communications  
cable. Do not ground shielding wire at more than one place.  
T-branch Tap or Power Supply Tap  
Ground at only one point  
or Communications Connector  
Power Supply Tap  
Power Supply Tap  
Master  
Master  
Slave  
Slave  
Slave  
PS  
PS  
PS  
PS  
When there is only one power supply  
When there are two or more power supplies  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Chapter 3  
Setup and Wiring  
3-1 Nomenclature and Settings  
3-2 Installation and Wiring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
3-1 Nomenclature and Settings  
3-1-1 Names of Parts  
Operation indicators  
PWR indicator  
MS indicator  
NS indicator  
Terminal block (TC)  
WD indicator  
Node address and  
baud rate setting  
pins  
Shielded grounding cable  
3-1-2 Terminal Block  
The following table provides details of the terminal block connected to the communications line.  
Display Sticker color  
Code  
V–  
Cable color  
Black  
Details  
Communications power supply ground.  
Communications data low side.  
Shield connection.  
1
Black  
Blue  
---  
2
3
4
5
CAN L  
SG  
Blue  
(Shield)  
White  
White  
Red  
CAN H  
V+  
Communications data high side.  
Communications power supply, 24 VDC.  
Red  
Black Blue White Red  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
3-1-3 Operation Indicators  
The CompoBus/D Communications Card has 4 operation indicators that show the status of the power  
and communications as described in the following table.  
Display  
Color Status  
Green Lit  
Indicator  
Meaning  
PWR  
Power is being supplied from the Inverter to the Card.  
Power is not being supplied from the Inverter.  
---  
Not lit  
The Card is not connected properly and power is not being supplied to it.  
The Card is operating normally.  
MS  
Green  
Lit  
Flashing  
Initial settings or necessary preparations for communications are incom-  
plete.  
Red  
---  
Lit  
A fatal error (hardware error) has occurred in the Card.  
A non-fatal error, such as a switch setting error, has occurred.  
Power is not being supplied from the Inverter.  
Flashing  
Not lit  
The Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied to it.  
The CompoBus/D Network (DeviceNet) is operating normally.  
NS  
Green  
Lit  
(Communications connection established.)  
Flashing  
Lit  
The Network is normal, but the communications connection with the Master  
Unit is not established.  
Red  
A fatal communications error has occurred.  
A CompoBus/D communications error was detected caused by node ad-  
dress duplication or Bus OFF. (These errors make communications impos-  
sible.)  
Flashing  
Not lit  
A non-fatal communications error has occurred due to communications  
timeout.  
---  
A CompoBus/D Network error has occurred. For example, the Network  
does not exist, power is not supplied to the Card, or the baud rates do not  
match.  
WD  
Green Flashing  
The CPU Unit of the Card is operating normally.  
Red  
---  
Lit  
The CPU Unit of the Card is not ready or the CPU Unit has malfunctioned.  
Power is not being supplied from the Inverter.  
Not lit  
The Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied to it.  
Note When both of the baud rate setting pins DR0 and DR1 are set to ON, both the MS and NS will be lit  
in red.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
3-1-4 Baud Rate and Node Address Settings  
In a CompoBus/D Network, the baud rate can be set to 500 Kbps, 250 Kbps, or 125 Kbps. To manage  
Master/Slave communications, numbers are assigned as node addresses.  
Baud rate setting pins  
Node address setting pins  
Note Default settings are all OFF.  
H Baud Rate Setting Pins  
Pin  
500 Kbps  
ON  
OFF  
250 Kbps  
OFF  
ON  
125 Kbps  
OFF  
OFF  
DR1  
DR0  
H Node Address Setting Pins  
Node Address  
Pin  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
to  
63  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ADR5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF to  
ADR4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF to  
ADR3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON  
ON  
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON  
OFF OFF ON ON  
OFF ON OFF ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
to  
to  
to  
to  
ADR2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON  
ADR1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON  
ADR0 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
Note 1. The same node address cannot be used for more than one Slave connected to the commu-  
nications line.  
Note 2. Remote I/O allocations in the CPU Unit are affected by the node addresses, so make sure that  
the remote I/O allocations do not overlap before setting a node address. Refer to Chapter 4  
CompoBus/D System Startup.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
3-2 Installation and Wiring  
WARNING Never touch any internal parts of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electric shock.  
!
!
WARNING Install, remove, or wire the Optional Card only after turning OFF the Inverter, making  
sure that all the indicators of the Inverter are OFF, and waiting for the time specified  
on the front cover of the Inverter to elapse. Not doing so may result in electric shock.  
WARNING Do not damage, press, or put excessive stress or heavy objects on the cables. Doing  
!
!
!
so may result in electric shock, product malfunction, or product damage.  
Caution  
Caution  
Do not touch the parts of the Optional Card by hand. Otherwise, static electricity may  
damage the Optional Card.  
Be sure that the connector of the Optional Card is firmly in place on the Inverter. Im-  
proper connection may cause injury, product malfunction, or product damage.  
3-2-1 CompoBus/D Communications Card Installation  
Caution  
Before installing and wiring an Optional Card, always turn OFF the power to the  
SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter and wait for the CHARGE indicator to turn OFF.  
!
H Mounting Procedure  
1. Turn OFF the Inverter, wait for at least one minute (or at least three minutes if the Inverter has an  
output capacity of 30 kW or more), remove the front cover of the Inverter, and check that the  
CHARGE indicator is not lit.  
2. Mount the Optional Card to the option C area.  
3. Insert the provided spacers into the spacer holes on the mounting base of the Inverter.  
4. After properly engaging the connectors of the Optional Card and control circuit board, insert the  
spacers to the spacer holes of the Optional Card, and press the Optional Card until the spacers  
click.  
5. Connect the shielded ground cable of the Optional Card to FG terminal 12 (E) on the control circuit  
board of the Inverter.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
6. Press the top of the connector 2CN and check that the apexes of the triangular marks on both sides  
match.  
Option A  
Control  
Connector  
4CN for  
option A area  
Circuit  
Board  
Option C  
Connector  
2CN for  
option C area  
Connector  
3CN for  
option D area  
Front View  
Side View  
Note When the CompoBus/D Communications Card is mounted, other Optional Cards cannot be  
mounted in the C area.  
3-2-2 Communications Cable Wiring  
H Connecting Communications Cables  
This section explains how to prepare and connect the communications cables to connectors for the  
CompoBus/D Network.  
Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications cables to the connectors.  
Note For connecting of the CompoBus/D Communications Card of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin  
Cables.  
Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions.  
1. Remove about 30 mm of the cable covering, being careful not to damage the shield weaving under-  
neath. Do not remove more than about 30 mm; removing too much of the covering can result in short  
circuits.  
About 30 mm  
2. Carefully peel back the weaving to reveal the signal lines, power lines, and the shielding wire. The  
shielding wire will be loose on the outside of the other lines, but it is harder than the weaving.  
Shielding wire  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
3. Remove the exposed weaving and the aluminum tape from the signal and power lines. Strip the  
covering from the signal and power lines to the proper length for the crimp terminals. Twist together  
the wires of each of the signal and power lines.  
Strip to match the crimp terminals  
H Inverter Internal Wiring  
Keep the CompoBus/D wiring separated from the main circuit wiring as much as possible. Do not wire  
them together.  
Inverters of 15 kW or Less  
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More  
Side panel of Inverter  
CompoBus/D  
communications  
line wiring  
CompoBus/D  
Operator  
Communications  
Card  
Pass the CompoBus/D  
communications line  
wiring by breaking off  
this portion.  
Main circuit wiring  
Control wiring  
Do not bundle the control wiring and  
main circuit wiring together.  
H CompoBus/D Communications Card Crimp Terminal  
To further improve the reliability and ease of wiring, use the following straight crimp terminal when wiring  
the communications cable to the terminal block of the CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
1.0 dia.  
Model: A1 0.58 WH (by Phoenix Contact)  
Unit: mm  
2.6 dia.  
H CompoBus/D Communications Card Terminal Block Wiring Procedure  
1. Loosen the terminal screws using a thin flat-blade screwdriver.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.  
3. Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0.5 N@m.  
Note 1. Separate the CompoBus/D communications cables from the main circuit wiring and other  
power lines.  
Note 2. Do not solder the ends of the electric wires. Doing so may cause contact failure.  
Note 3. If straight crimp terminals are not used, strip the electrical wires to a length of 5.5 mm.  
Note 4. Do not tighten the screws to a torque exceeding 0.5 N@m. Doing so may damage the terminal  
block. If the screws are too loose, however, malfunctions or short circuits may result.  
Thin flat-blade screwdriver  
al block (TC)  
Strip to 5.5
(if straight
terminal is
used).  
Wire  
H Connecting Communications Cables to T-branch Taps  
For connecting the CompoBus/D Communications Card, use DCA1-5C10 Thin Cables and branch  
them from the T-branch Tap. This is done for reasons of terminal block dimensions and easy mainte-  
nance.  
Note 1. Thick Cables cannot be used for this wiring.  
Note 2. As for multi-drop wiring, use Thin Cables for direct insertion.  
This section shows how to connect a communications cable with a connector attached to a T-branch  
Tap. There are two kinds of T-branch Taps, one makes a single branch and the other makes three  
branches, but the cable connections are the same for both.  
The connectors indicated by asterisks in the following diagrams have the least resistance and these  
connectors should be used for the trunk line connections. When using a T-branch Tap on a drop line,  
connect the longest drop line to these connectors.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
D DCN1-1C T-branch Tap  
* Use for trunk line of  
longest drop line.  
D DCN1-3C T-branch Tap  
* Use for trunk line of  
longest drop line.  
D T-branch Tap Connectors  
The required number of connectors (on cable side) for T-branch Taps are supplied with the product.  
Name  
COMBICON Plug with Screw Flange  
MSTBP 2515-STF-5.08 AB AU SO  
Phoenix Contact  
Model  
Manufacturer  
Align the cable connector with the socket on the T-branch Tap as shown in the following diagram and  
fully insert the connector into the socket. Tighten the set screws to secure the connection. Tighten the  
screws to a torque of 0.3 N@m.  
Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires, do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when  
connecting it to the T-branch Tap. Also, never place heavy objects on top of the cable.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup and Wiring  
Chapter 3  
H Connecting Terminating Resistors  
Terminating resistors must be connected at each end of the trunk line. Use the methods described here  
to connect the Terminating Resistors.  
D T-branch Tap Terminating Resistor  
A Terminating Resistor is included with the T-branch Tap. Insert the Terminating Resistor into the T-  
branch Tap as shown in the following diagram. The Terminating Resistor can face in either direction.  
D Terminal-block Terminating Resistor  
20  
20 max.  
41 max.  
A Terminating Resistor is built into the Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. To connect the cable to the  
Terminating Resistor, attach standard M3 crimp terminals to the signal wires and securely screw the  
terminals to the Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. Tighten to a torque of 0.5 N@m.  
6.0 mm max.  
6.0 mm max.  
Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires, do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when  
connecting it to the terminal block. Also, never place heavy objects on top of the cable.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Chapter 4  
CompoBus/D System  
Startup  
4-1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List  
4-2 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings  
4-3 Startup Procedure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
4-1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List  
In a CompoBus/D Network, remote I/O and message communications can be used simultaneously.  
This section describes remote I/O communications, particularly the memory words allocated in the  
SYSMAC PC that correspond to the remote I/O of the Slaves.  
4-1-1 Overview and Restrictions of Word Allocations  
H Fixed Allocation: Without Configurator  
If a Configurator is not used, default word allocations are used in the CompoBus/D Master Unit. The  
remote I/O is allocated in the order of CompoBus/D node addresses and the words are divided into out-  
put areas and input areas. The word allocation default settings of the Master Unit are set based on the  
assumption that one node should occupy one input word and one output word. Output words will be  
allocated even to Units that are used only for input.  
For Units that require two input words or two output words, the node addresses to which the second  
word is normally allocated cannot be set. If it is set, the word allocations will overlap.  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs  
CV-series PCs  
CIO 1900  
Output  
CIO 1900 Node 0  
CIO 1901 Node 1  
IR 50  
IR 50  
IR 51  
Node 0  
Node 1  
Output  
area  
To Slaves  
To Slaves  
area  
CIO 1963  
CIO 1962 Node 62  
CIO 1963 Node 63  
IR 99  
IR 98  
IR 99  
Node 62  
Node 63  
CIO 2000  
Input  
CIO 2000 Node 0  
CIO 2001 Node 1  
IR 350  
Input  
IR 350  
IR 351  
Node 0  
Node 1  
area  
area  
From Slaves  
From Slaves  
CIO 2063  
CIO 2064 Node 62  
CIO 2063 Node 63  
IR 399  
IR 398  
IR 399  
Node 62  
Node 63  
C200HS PCs  
IR 50  
IR 50  
IR 51  
Node 0  
Node 1  
Output  
To Slaves  
area  
IR 81  
IR 80  
IR 81  
Node 62  
Node 63  
IR 350  
Input  
IR 350  
IR 351  
Node 0  
Node 1  
area  
From Slaves  
IR 381  
IR 380  
IR 381  
Node 62  
Node 63  
Each node address is allocated one input and one output word starting from node 00. If a Slave requires  
more than one input or one output word, then it is assigned more than one node address. If a Slave  
requires less than one word, it simply uses the rightmost bits in the word allocated to it.  
H Free Allocation: With Configurator  
A Configurator can be used to allocate words in the CompoBus/D Master Unit in any order by calling  
parameters of the Master Unit and changing the word allocation of parameters. The following alloca-  
tions are possible when using a Configurator.  
Output words do not need to be allocated to Input Units, only input words.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
Slaves that require two words can be allocated two words using only one node address so that the next  
node addresses can be set for another Slave.  
Remote I/O words can be allocated in sequence regardless of the order of the node addresses.  
Note The Configurator uses one node address. Therefore, the number of Slaves that can be connected  
is reduced if the Network is to be operated with the Configurator still connected. The Configurator  
can be removed, however, after the words have been allocated, and then another Slave can be  
connected to the Network in its place so that the number of Slaves that can be connected is not  
reduced.  
Blocks can be positioned in any order in memory,  
e.g., the following order is okay: input block 1, out-  
put block 2, input block 2, output block 1.  
CPU Unit  
Address  
Output area  
Output  
To Slaves  
Address  
block 1  
Address  
Output  
block 2  
Address  
Address  
Addresses can be as-  
signed in any order  
Input area  
Input  
block 1  
Address  
Address  
From Slaves  
Input  
block 2  
Address  
Words are freely allocated to the Slaves and I/O blocks can be set as desired. Each node must be allo-  
cated at least one byte (leftmost or rightmost). If a Slave requires more than one input or one output  
word, then it can be allocated more than one input or output word. If a Slave requires less than one word,  
it will use either the rightmost or leftmost bits in the word allocated to it.  
D Free Allocation Restrictions  
The following restrictions apply when freely allocating remote I/O.  
The remote I/O allocated to one Slave cannot be separated, i.e., all input words must be consecutive,  
as must all output words. Inputs and outputs, however, can be separated.  
With a Slave requiring more than one word, a series of allocations cannot be started from the leftmost  
byte of the remote I/O. The leftmost byte, however, can be allocated to a Slave requiring only 8 bits.  
Multiple words cannot be allocated as the remote I/O for a single Slave.  
A Slave cannot be assigned to more than one Master Unit.  
4-1-2 Scan Lists  
H The Scan List  
Scan lists record information in the Master Unit on the Slaves that are connected to them. If the scan list  
is enabled, the information on each Slave is recorded, and can be used to determine normal Compo-  
Bus/D communications. The scan list provides the following information on each Slave.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
Slave remote I/O allocations providing the number of I/O words allocated to and the node address set  
for each Slave.  
Communications parameters providing the initial remote I/O communications status and the commu-  
nications cycle time settings.  
H Scan List Application  
A scan list is not required for a Network with only one Master Unit and remote I/O that is allocated ac-  
cording to the fixed settings. The scan list is necessary, however, in the following cases.  
To confirm the increase or decrease of Slaves on the communications line, and to detect errors in a  
Network where the number of Slaves has increased or decreased, it is necessary to record the system  
status.  
For free allocation of remote I/O, it is necessary to record the number of I/O words allocated to each  
Slave.  
When using multiple Master Units to exchange information with the SYSMAC PC (CPU Unit), it is nec-  
essary for each Master Unit to record the node addresses for each Slave.  
H Creating Scan Lists  
D Fixed Remote I/O Allocations  
A scan list can be created by turning ON the Enable Scan List software switch when the CPU Unit is in  
PROGRAM mode, when communications are active and the scan list is disabled. All Slaves that are  
participating normally in the Network will be registered in the scan list.  
D Free Remote I/O Allocations  
The user creates the scan list using the Configurator and then registers it in the Master Unit. Settings for  
all Masters and Slaves participating normally in the Network are used as a basis for creating the scan  
list.  
Scan list enabled  
Fixed allocations  
Scan list disabled  
Remote I/O communications  
Free allocations  
Scan list enabled  
Scan List Disabled  
Scan List Enabled  
Fixed allocations  
All Slaves.  
Fixed allocations  
Registered using  
software switch.  
All Slaves participating  
normally in the Network.  
Scan list  
Slave I/O allocations  
Communications pa-  
rameters  
Free allocations  
Set as required using  
the Configurator.  
Registered as scan  
list in the Master Unit.  
Note The scan lists created with the Configurator will be required again for registration in the Master  
Unit if the Master Unit is ever set to disable the scan list or if the Master Unit is replaced. Be sure to  
save any scan lists created with the Configurator as network files or master parameter files.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
H Using Scan Lists  
Chapter 4  
D Enabling/Disabling a Scan List  
To enable a scan list, turn ON the Enable Scan List software switch or use the Configurator. To disable a  
scan list, turn ON the Clear Scan List software switch.  
Note 1. Scan lists cannot be disabled from the Configurator. The scan list will always be enabled when  
created on the Configurator and registered in a Master Unit.  
Note 2. Always enable the scan list during actual system operation. Although operation is possible  
with the scan list disabled when the fixed allocations are used, communications will continue  
even if Slaves fail, creating the possibility of undetected errors in system operation.  
D Scan List Enabled  
When a scan list is enabled, communications are performed according to the scan list stored in the Mas-  
ter Units non-volatile memory. Either fixed allocation or free allocation of remote I/O is possible.  
The Master will communicate only with the Slaves registered in the scan list. A verification error will  
occur if a Slave registered in the scan list does not exist in the Network or is not started when I/O commu-  
nications begin. Even if it is properly connected in the Network, a Slave which is not registered in the  
scan list will not participate in communications and will not be checked for errors.  
D Scan List Disabled  
When a scan list is disabled, communications are performed without using the scan list. The scan list is  
disabled when the scan list has not been created or it has been cleared. Do not disable the scan list  
during actual system operation.  
All of the Slaves in the Network can communicate with the scan list disabled, so Slaves can be added to  
the Network while communications are in progress. Without a scan list, however, there is no way to  
check for Slaves that have not started or have failed, and errors can thus go undetected. The commu-  
nications cycle time will be much longer that the computational value when the scan list is disabled.  
When a scan list is disabled, operation is possible only by using the fixed I/O allocations. Free allocation  
is not possible.  
Note 1. The scan list is automatically enabled when the Configurator is used to allocate remote I/O. If  
the software switch is used to clear the scan list, remote I/O communications will operate un-  
der the default allocations with the scan list disabled. Always confirm that the system is  
stopped before disabling the scan list in a Master Unit. This is particularly important if there is  
more than one Master on the same Network. If the scan list is disabled for one of the Masters,  
normally communications will not be possible.  
Note 2. The scan list data in a Master Unit is deleted whenever the scan list is disabled.  
4-1-3 Fixed Word Allocations  
H Allocation Areas for Different PCs  
If fixed allocations are used, the node addresses and the words allocated to them are determined ac-  
cording to the PC used. The remote I/O allocation area consists of the input area that receives input from  
the Slaves, and the output area that writes output data to the Slaves.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
SYSMAC Programmable Controllers  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs  
Node  
address  
CV-series PCs  
Output area Input area  
(CIO 1900 to (CIO 2000 to  
CIO 1963)  
CIO 1900  
CIO 1901  
CIO 1902  
...  
C200HS PCs  
Output area  
Input area  
Output area  
Input area  
(IR 50 to IR  
99)  
(IR 350 to IR  
399)  
(IR 50 to IR  
81)  
(IR 350 to IR  
381)  
CIO 2063)  
CIO 2000  
CIO 2001  
CIO 2002  
...  
0
IR 50  
IR 350  
IR 351  
IR 352  
...  
IR 50  
IR 51  
IR 52  
...  
IR 350  
IR 351  
IR 352  
...  
1
IR 51  
IR 52  
...  
2
...  
30  
31  
32  
...  
CIO 1930  
CIO 1931  
CIO 1932  
...  
CIO 2030  
CIO 2031  
CIO 2032  
...  
IR 80  
IR 81  
IR 82  
...  
IR 380  
IR 381  
IR 382  
...  
IR 80  
IR 81  
---  
IR 380  
IR 381  
---  
---  
---  
48  
49  
50  
...  
CIO 1948  
CIO 1949  
CIO 1950  
...  
CIO 2048  
CIO 2049  
CIO 2050  
...  
IR 98  
IR 99  
---  
IR 398  
IR 399  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
62  
63  
CIO 1962  
CIO 1963  
CIO 2062  
CIO 2063  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Note 1. The words corresponding to the node address of the Master Unit are not actually used by the  
Master Unit, so they can be used by other Slaves. The actual node address of the Master Unit,  
however, cannot be the same as the node address of another Slave.  
Note 2. When Slaves made by other companies are used that are for either output only or input only,  
both the output area and the input area may be used depending on the status information.  
Therefore, be sure to check the specifications of the Slave before using any word allocated to  
a Slave.  
H I/O Allocations and Errors  
A setup error may occur when the scan list is disabled or a verification error may occur when the scan list  
is enabled if I/O allocations are not correct.  
D Setup Error: I/O Area Overlap  
A setup error (I/O Area Overlap) will occur and it will not be possible to start CompoBus/D communica-  
tions if the same word is used by more than one Slave connected to a SYSMAC Master Unit. This error  
will occur only when the scan list is disabled.  
To eliminate the I/O area overlap and clear this error, change the node address setting on one of the  
Slaves and restart the Master Unit by turning ON the power again or restarting.  
D Setup Error: I/O Area Range Violation  
A setup error (I/O Area Range Violation) will occur and it will not be possible to start CompoBus/D com-  
munications if node addresses are set at values that exceed the specified range, or if Slaves that use  
multiple words are using more words than are specified in the I/O area. This error will occur only when  
the scan list is disabled.  
To eliminate the above problems and clear this error, change the node address setting on the Slaves  
and restart the Master Unit by turning ON the power again or restarting.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
D Verification Error: Slave I/O Size Differs  
A verification error (Slave I/O Size Differs) will occur and it will not be possible to start CompoBus/D  
communications if a Master Unit is being used with the scan list enabled and the type of I/O (input or  
output) or the number of I/O points registered for a Slave in the scan list does not match the actual I/O  
specifications of the Slave that is connected to the Master Unit. This error will occur only when the scan  
list is enabled.  
To eliminate and clear this error, either create the scan list again or replace the Slave with the kind of  
Slave registered in the scan list.  
Note The scan list verification is performed in byte units (8 bits). A verification error will therefore not  
occur if a 1-point Input Slave is used instead of an 8-point Input Slave.  
H Fixed Allocation Example  
Output area  
Input area  
Input  
points  
Node  
address  
Output  
points  
Allocation  
not possible  
Allocation not possible  
CIO 2000  
CIO 2001  
CIO 2002  
CIO 2003  
CIO 2004  
CIO 2005  
CIO 2006  
CIO 2007  
Allocated  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
CIO 1900  
CIO 1901  
CIO 1902  
CIO 1903  
CIO 1904  
CIO 1905  
CIO 1906  
CIO 1907  
0
Allocation  
Allocated  
Allocation not possible  
Allocated  
0
8
not possible  
Allocation not possible  
16  
0
0
16  
8
Allocation not possible  
Allocated  
Allocation  
Allocated  
Allocation  
not possible  
Allocated  
8
not possible  
Allocated  
Allocated  
16  
0
16  
48  
. . .  
Allocated  
Allocated  
Allocated  
Allocation not possible  
. . .  
Allocation possible  
Allocated  
7
Master Unit (see note 2)  
CIO 2008  
CIO 2009  
8
9
32 . . .  
0
CIO 1908  
CIO 1909  
. . .  
(see note 3)  
Allocation possible  
Allocated  
Allocated  
Allocated  
CIO 2010  
10  
11  
12  
CIO 1910  
. . .  
32  
Allocated  
32  
CIO 2011  
CIO 2012  
Allocated  
Not used  
CIO 1911  
CIO 1912  
Not used  
Not used  
None  
None  
CIO 2063  
Not used  
CIO 1963  
63  
None  
None  
Note 1. The above example is for allocations in a CV-series PC.  
Note 2. The Master Unit is not allocated any words, so any available node address can be used as  
node address 7.  
Note 3. Slaves can be allocated to the words labeled Allocation possibleas long as the same words  
are not allocated to more than one Slave.  
H Basic Application Procedure  
1. Set the initial settings for the Master Unit:  
Unit number (UNIT No.or MACHINE No.on front panel switch)  
Node address (back panel DIP switch)  
Baud rate (front panel DIP switch)  
Communications continue/stop setting for communications error (front panel switch)  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
2. Set the initial settings for the Slaves:  
Node address (DIP switch)  
Baud rate (DIP switch)  
Etc.  
3. Mount the Master Unit and wire the Network.  
For CV-series PCs, Master Units are treated as CPU Bus Units and can be mounted to the CPU  
Rack or Expansion CPU Rack. Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used,  
but up to 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used.  
For C200HX/HG/HE PCs, Masters are treated as Special I/O Units and can be mounted to the CPU  
Rack or Expansion I/O Rack. Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used, but  
up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used.  
For C200HS PCs, Masters are treated as Special I/O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or  
Expansion I/O Rack. Only one Master Unit can mounted if a Configurator is not used, but up to 10 or  
16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used.  
4. Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn ON the power supply to the PC.  
5. Generate the I/O table.  
6. Turn ON the power supply to the Slaves and turn ON the communications power supply.  
7. Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode.  
8. Perform the following and go to step 11. if the scan list was disabled at startup.  
a) Confirm that communications are possible with the registered slaves by monitoring the Regis-  
tered Slave Data Area.  
b) From a Programming Device connected to the PC, turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the soft-  
ware switches (bit 0).  
Remote I/O communications will start with the scan list enabled. The software switches can be used  
to start and stop remote I/O communications.  
9. Perform the following from the Programming Device connected to the PC and go to step 11. if the  
scan list was enabled at startup and you want to re-register the scan list.  
a) Turn ON the Scan List Clear Bit in the software switches (bit 1).  
b) Confirm that communications are possible with the registered slaves by monitoring the Regis-  
tered Slave Data Area.  
c) Turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the software switches (bit 0).  
Remote I/O communications will start with the scan list enabled. The software switches can be used  
to start and stop remote I/O communications.  
10. Do nothing if the scan list was enabled at startup and the scan list does not need to be changed.  
Remote I/O communications will start with the scan list enabled. The software switches can be used  
to start and stop remote I/O communications. Go to step 11.  
11. Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit.  
12. Switch the PC to RUN mode.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
4-1-4 Free Allocations  
H Allocation Areas and Maximum Words for Different PCs  
When free allocations are used, the remote I/O areas consist of input blocks 1 and 2, which input Slave  
data to the PC, and output blocks 1 and 2, which output data from the PC to the Slaves. These four  
blocks can be allocated as desired using the following words. Each block, however, must consist of con-  
tinuous words within one data area.  
SYSMAC Programmable Controllers  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs  
PC  
C200HS PCs  
(all models)  
CV-series PCs  
CV500/  
CVM1-CPU01-E  
All other  
models  
C200HE-CPU11-E  
All other  
models  
Words that  
can be  
CIO 0000 to  
CIO 2427  
CIO 0000 to IR 000 to IR 235, IR 300 to IR 511  
CIO 2555  
IR 000 to IR 235,  
IR 300 to IR 511  
allocated  
G008 to G255  
HR 00 to HR 99  
LR 00 to LR 63  
HR 00 to HR 99  
LR 00 to LR 63  
D00000 to D08191 D00000 to  
D24575  
DM 0000 to DM 4095 DM 0000 to  
DM 5999  
DM 0000 to  
DM 5999  
Max. No. of Each block can be up to  
Each block can be up to 100 words  
(including unused areas).  
The total number  
of words in all  
four blocks must  
be 80 words or  
less (including  
unused areas).  
words  
100 words (including unused  
areas).  
The total number of words in all four  
blocks must be 300 words or less  
(including unused areas).  
If message communications are  
used, the total number of words in  
all four blocks must be 100 words or  
less.  
Note 1. The Data Memory (DM) Area cannot manipulated by bit, so it is not suitable as the remote I/O  
allocation area for the Inverter.  
Note 2. If a CPU Bus Link is used with a CV-series PC, the G Area is used for the CPU Bus Link, mak-  
ing it impossible to use this area for CompoBus/D communications.  
Input area  
Output area  
Start word  
Input block 1  
Start word  
Output block 1  
Output block 2  
No. of words  
allocated (oc-  
cupied)  
No. of words  
allocated (oc-  
cupied)  
Start word  
Start word  
Input block 2  
No. of words  
allocated (oc-  
cupied)  
No. of words  
allocated (oc-  
cupied)  
Note Using a Configurator, set the areas for each block, the start word, and the allocated words for  
each block.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
H Free Allocation Restrictions  
Each node address can be set only once in the output blocks and once in the input blocks.  
The same node ad-  
dress cannot be set  
twice.  
Output block 1  
Node 02  
Output block 2  
Node 02  
WRONG  
If a Configurator is used to freely allocate words or bytes to each Slave, only a Slave using only one  
byte (8 bits) can be set in the leftmost byte of the allocated word. Slaves with more than 8 bits cannot be  
set for the leftmost bit of the allocated word.  
Start byte  
15  
Only one byte can be set  
if the first byte is a left-  
most byte.  
0
WRONG  
The same Slave cannot be allocated words in more than one Master.  
Master  
Master  
ords must be allocated to a  
ave from one Master only.  
Note The master parameter file duplication check from the Configurator can be used to check for node  
addresses that have been set more than once in the scan list, which shows the I/O allocations that  
have been made.  
Always use the Configurator when there is more than one Master and enable the scan lists. A Bus OFF  
error can occur if there is more than one Master with the scan list disabled on the same Network.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
H Example of Free Allocations  
Output area  
Input area  
Input block 1  
Output Input  
Node  
address  
Output block 1  
Allocated (00)  
points  
points  
16  
0
1
2
0
CIO 1950  
CIO 1951  
CIO 1952  
CIO 1900  
CIO 1901  
Allocated (02)  
Allocated (03)  
Allocated (01)  
8
8
Allocated (01)  
Not used  
Allocated (02)  
16  
16  
3
0
8
0
CIO 1953  
CIO 1954  
Allocated (10)  
Allocated (10)  
10  
32  
Input block 2  
Input  
points  
Node  
address  
Output  
points  
Output block 2  
CIO 0010  
CIO 0011  
CIO 0012  
CIO 0013  
CIO 0014  
CIO 0015  
Allocated (04)  
Allocated (04)  
Allocated (12)  
0
4
CIO 2000  
48  
8
Not used  
0
9
Allocated (04)  
Not used  
12  
8
16  
Allocated (12)  
Not used  
Allocated (09)  
Note The above example is for a CV-series PC.  
H Basic Application Procedure  
1. Set the initial settings for the Master Unit:  
Unit number (UNIT No.or MACHINE No.on front panel switch)  
Node address (back panel DIP switch)  
Baud rate (front panel DIP switch)  
Communications continue/stop setting for communications error (front panel switch)  
2. Set the initial settings for the Slaves:  
Node address (DIP switch)  
Baud rate (DIP switch)  
Etc.  
3. Mount the Master Unit and wire the Network.  
For CV-series PCs, Master Units are treated as CPU Bus Units and can be mounted to the CPU  
Rack or Expansion CPU Rack. Up to 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used.  
For C200HX/HG/HE PCs, Masters are treated as Special I/O Units and can be mounted to the CPU  
Rack or Expansion I/O Rack. Up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used.  
For C200HS PCs, Masters are treated as Special I/O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or  
Expansion I/O Rack. Up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used.  
4. Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn ON the power supply to the PC.  
5. Generate the I/O table.  
6. Turn OFF the power to the PC.  
7. Go to step 8. if only one Master Unit is being used and to step 15. if more than one Master Unit is  
being used in the same Network.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
8. Connect a Configurator to the Network.  
9. Turn ON the power supply to all nodes.  
10. Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode.  
11. Get the device list and create the master parameters with the Configurator.  
12. If more than one Master Unit is mounted to the same PC, use the Configurator to check for duplica-  
tion in the master parameter settings.  
13. Register the master parameters in the Master Unit(s).  
14. Go to step 28.  
15. Connect a Configurator to the Network.  
16. Turn ON the power supply to all the Slaves.  
17. Read the Network configuration from the Configurator.  
18. Turn OFF the power supply to all the Slaves.  
19. Create the master parameters for each Master Unit and save the parameters in files.  
20. Turn ON the power supply to one PC (i.e., to one of the Master Units).  
21. Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode.  
22. Read the Network configuration from the Configurator.  
23. Read the master parameter file for the Master Unit that has been turned ON from the master param-  
eter editing screen.  
24. Write the master parameters created in the above step 19.  
25. Turn OFF the power supply to the PC (i.e., the Master Unit) and the Slaves.  
26. Repeat the above steps beginning at step 20. for all Master Units.  
27. Turn ON the power supply to all Masters and Slaves.  
28. Remote I/O communications will start with the scan list enabled. (Communications will not start if  
they have been set to be stopped at startup from the Configurator.) Use the software switches or  
Configurator to start and stop remote I/O communications.  
29. Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit.  
30. Read the Network configuration from the Configurator.  
31. Save the Network configuration in a file from the Configurator.  
32. Switch the PC to RUN mode.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
4-2 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings  
Set the parameters according to the applications of the Inverter for CompoBus/D communications. The  
shaded part in the following table indicates the default setting.  
Note The parameters set here are applied to the CompoBus/D Communications Card when the power  
is turned ON. Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them.  
4-2-1 Frequency Reference Selection  
Default setting: 1  
Constant  
Content  
REF indicator of  
Digital Operator  
B1-01  
0
1
2
3
D1-01  
Frequency reference from D1-01  
Not lit  
Lit  
External terminals  
Do not set (not used)  
Optional Card  
Frequency reference from external input  
Frequency reference from CompoBus/D  
Communications Card  
Lit  
Always set 3when using the CompoBus/D Communications Card. By setting 3,the frequency refer-  
ence value 1 can be set only by CompoBus/D communications.  
Note 1. This setting enables frequency reference 1 only.  
Frequency reference can be set for frequency references 2 to 8 through CompoBus/D com-  
munications and Digital Operator without B1-01.  
Note 2. If the S1042 or later software version of the Inverter is used, settings other than 3 can be  
made, and Frequency Reference 1 can be switched with communications using the Net. Ref.  
signal. (Communications setting or b1-03 setting.)  
4-2-2 Inverter Run Command Selection  
Default setting: 1  
Constant  
Content  
SEQ indicator of  
Digital Operator  
B1-02  
Run  
Source  
Sel.  
0
1
2
3
Digital Operator  
Operation command from Digital Operator Not lit  
Operation command from external input Lit  
External terminals  
Do not set (not used)  
Communications  
Operation command through communica- Lit  
tions  
Always set 3when using the CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
Note If the S1042 or later software version of the Inverter is used, settings other than 3can be made,  
and Run Command can be switched with communications using the Net. Ctrl. signal. (Commu-  
nications setting or b1-03 setting.)  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
4-2-3 CompoBus/D Communications Settings  
The parameters below have been added for functions that are exclusive to CompoBus/D communica-  
tions. Set these parameters according to the desired application.  
Name  
Constant  
Content  
Setting Default  
range setting  
Operator display  
F9-01  
0: N.O. input (external fault detected when 1) 0, 1  
1: N.C. input (external fault detected when 0)  
0
Communications external  
fault input selection  
CP-916 Setup  
F9-02  
F9-03  
0: Fault detection during power ON  
0, 1  
0
2
Communications external  
fault input detection  
method selection  
1: Fault detected during running only (when  
RUN commands are input)  
EF0 Detection  
0: Decelerates to a stop using C1-02 decel-  
eration time/fault detection  
0 to 3  
Communications external  
fault input operation  
selection  
1: Coast to a stop/fault detection  
2: Decelerates to a stop using C1-09 decel-  
eration time/fault detection  
EF0 fault Action  
Not used  
3: Continues operating/alarm detection (see  
note 1)  
Do not set  
F9-04  
F9-05  
F9-06  
0 to  
0
2
0
0 to 3  
0: Decelerates to a stop using C1-02 decel-  
eration time/fault detection  
0 to  
3,300  
CompoBus/D Fault op-  
eration selection  
1: Coast to a stop/fault detection  
2: Decelerates to a stop using C1-09 decel-  
eration time/fault detection  
BUS Fault Sel  
3: Continues operating/alarm detection (see  
note 1)  
Note 1. If F9-03 or F9-06 is set to 3, the Inverter will continue operating. Be sure to install a limit switch  
or an emergency stop switch as a safety precaution.  
Note 2. The parameters for F9-06 are supported for Inverter software versions S1042 and later.  
Check whether the parameter is applicable using the Inverters monitor function U1-14. In-  
verters that do not support F9-06 will always coast to a stop.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
4-2-4 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units  
The parameters for units of frequency (speed) data used in CompoBus/D communications are set with  
the following constant. The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r/min, so always set the number of  
motor poles.  
Default setting: 0  
Constant  
Content  
o1-03  
0
0.01 Hz  
1
0.01% (max. frequency is 100 %)  
2 to 39  
r/min (Set the number of motor poles.)  
Specifies the value used to set and display the maximum frequency.  
jjjjj  
40 to 39,999  
Set a 4-digit value without the decimal point.  
Set the position of the digit where the decimal point is to be displayed  
starting from the rightmost digit.  
Example: To display the maximum frequency as 200.0specify 12000.”  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D System Startup  
Chapter 4  
4-3 Startup Procedure  
The CompoBus/D communications system can be started from any of the nodes on the Network. The  
following procedure gives the startup process after turning ON the power to the Inverters CompoBus/D  
Communications Card. If the startup process shown below is interrupted or stops before being com-  
pleted, an error will occur. Correct errors that occur, referring to Chapter 6 Communications Errors.  
1. Turn ON the power.  
2. The PWR indicator will turn ON: Power is being supplied.  
3. The MS indicator will be lit red and then green: Confirming MS indicator status.  
4. The NS indicator will be lit red and then green: Confirming MS indicator status.  
5. The MS indicator will flash: Shows Optional Card startup processing status.  
6. The MS indicator will be lit: The Optional Card is ready.  
7. The NS indicator will flash: The Optional Card is connected to the Network and startup processing is  
being performed.  
8. The NS indicator will be lit: The Network is started.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Chapter 5  
CompoBus/D  
Communications Card  
Operations  
5-1 Remote I/O  
5-2 Message Communications  
(DeviceNet Explicit Messages)  
5-3 Switching Remote I/O Operation  
5-4 Special Remote I/O Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Caution  
Be careful when changing settings. Not doing so may result in injury or product dam-  
age.  
!
5-1 Remote I/O  
There are two types of CompoBus/D communications: Remote I/O and message communications.  
There are three types of remote I/O operation: Basic remote I/O, standard remote I/O, and special re-  
mote I/O. This section explains standard remote I/O operations and the types of remote I/O.  
Note To use special remote I/O, it is necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Switching the remote  
I/O operation involves the use of message communications, so refer to 5-2 Message Commu-  
nications and 5-3 Switching Remote I/O Operations. Also, for details regarding special remote  
I/O, refer to 5-4 Special Remote I/O.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-1-1 Standard Remote I/O (Initial Setting)  
The type of remote I/O operation pre-set as the initial setting for the Inverters CompoBus/D Commu-  
nications Card is standard remote I/O. This remote I/O can be used for general Inverter control.  
Note:T-branch wiring using  
Thin Cables  
Wd  
15  
to  
0
n
Inverter run commands  
Rotational speed reference  
n+1  
Switch  
Run  
Reverse  
Forward  
Stop  
than Ver. 1042.)  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Words Allocated to SYSDRIVE 3G3FV-series Inverters  
A SYSDRIVE 3G3FV-series Inverter is allocated a total of four SYSMAC I/O words (two input and two  
output) via a CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
Bits  
I/O classification  
Word address  
15 to 8  
7 to 0  
Output  
n
Not used.  
Inverter run commands  
(SYSMAC PC to  
Inverter)  
n+1  
Rotational speed reference  
(leftmost bits)  
Rotational speed reference  
(rightmost bits)  
Input  
m
Not used.  
Inverter status  
(Inverter to  
SYSMAC PC)  
m+1  
Rotational speed monitor  
(leftmost bits)  
Rotational speed monitor  
(rightmost bits)  
D Inverter Run Commands  
Word  
n
Bit  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Signal  
name  
Not used.  
Net Reference  
Net Control  
Not used.  
Not used.  
Fault Reset Reverse/  
stop  
Forward/  
stop  
Content  
---  
0: b1-01  
0: b1-02  
---  
---  
0: ---  
1: Fault  
Reset  
0: Stop  
1: Reverse 1: Forward  
0: Stop  
1: CompoBus/D 1: CompoBus/D  
(See note 1.) (See note 2.)  
Note 1. Net Reference is used to specify the frequency reference as follows (cannot be changed dur-  
ing running):  
0: The frequency reference input method specified by the frequency reference source selec-  
tion (b101) is used.  
1: Set b101 to 3and operate via CompoBus/D. (Operate with rotational speed reference in  
word n+1.)  
Note 2. Net Control is used to change the run command as follows (cannot be changed during run-  
ning):  
0: The run command input method specified by the run command source selection (b102) is  
used.  
1: Set b102 to 3and operate via CompoBus/D. (Follow run command in word n, bits 0 and  
1.)  
Note 3. The Net Reference and Net Control functions are applicable for Inverter software versions  
S1042 and later. Check the version with the Inverter monitor function U114. If the software  
version is S1040, set b101 and b102 to 3.”  
D Inverter Status  
Word  
m
Bit  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Signal  
name  
At Reference  
Reference  
From Net  
Control From  
Net  
Inverter  
Ready  
During  
reverse run  
During  
forward run  
Warning  
(Minor  
Fault)  
Fault  
Content  
0: Accelerating 0: b1-01  
0: b1-02  
0:  
0: Stop/  
0: Stop/  
reverse  
1: During  
forward run  
0: Normal  
1: Alarm  
(Minor  
0: Normal  
1: Fault  
or  
1: CompoBus/D 1: CompoBus/D Preparing forward  
(See note 1.)  
Decelerating  
1: At reference  
(See note 2.)  
1: Ready 1: During  
reverse run  
Fault)  
(See note 4.) (See note 5.)  
Note 1. Reference From Net shows the input status of word n, bit 6 (Net Reference) for CompoBus/D  
communications.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Note 2. Control From Net shows the input status of word n, bit 5 (Net Control) for CompoBus/D com-  
munications.  
Note 3. The Reference From Net and Control From Net functions are applicable for Inverter software  
versions S1042 and later. Check the version with the Inverter monitor function U114.  
Note 4. Reverse Operation indicates reverse output status. This bit does not turn ON for DC braking  
(DC injection).  
Note 5. Forward Operation indicates either forward run status or DC braking (DC injection) status.  
This bit turns ON even for DC braking (DC injection) during reverse run.  
D Rotational Speed Reference Data  
Word address  
n+1  
Bit  
15  
Rotational speed reference data  
Communications data = Rotational speed reference x 2  
a: Speed scale value of Class 2A, Instance 01, Attribute 16 (Initial value: 0)  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Signal name  
Content  
a
The speed scale is assigned to the message function. For instructions on how to change it, refer to 5-2 Mes-  
sage Communications.  
The unit for the rotational speed reference is set in o103 (frequency reference setting and display units)  
Setting example (providing reference of 1,800 r/min):  
When the speed scale value is 0and the number of motor poles is set in 0103 (so unit is r/min):  
0
1,800 r/min 1,800 x2 1,800 0708 Hex  
Note 1. Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r/min. The number  
of motor poles (2 to 32) must be set in parameter o103 (frequency reference setting and dis-  
play units) when using DeviceNet (open network).  
Note 2. If the setting in not within the proper range, the previous data will be retained and the desig-  
nated rotational speed will not be entered.  
D Rotational Speed Monitor Data  
Word address  
m+1  
Bit  
15  
Rotational speed monitor data  
Communications data = Rotational speed monitor x 2  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Signal name  
Content  
a
a: Speed scale value of Class 2A, Instance 01, Attribute 16 (Initial value: 0)  
The speed scale is assigned to the message function. For instructions on how to change it, refer to 5-2 Mes-  
sage Communications.  
The unit for the rotational speed monitor is set in o103 (frequency reference setting and display units)  
Data conversion example:  
When the speed scale value is 0and the number of motor poles is set in 0103, and the read data is 03E8  
Hex:  
0
03E8 Hex 1,000 1,000/2 1,000 r/min  
Note Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r/min. The number of  
motor poles (2 to 32) must be set in parameter o103 (frequency reference setting and display  
units) when using DeviceNet (open network).  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-1-2 Types of Remote I/O Operation  
There are three types of CompoBus/D Communications Card remote I/O operation:  
Basic remote I/O: Remote I/O operation for the standard DeviceNet configuration.  
Standard remote I/O: Remote I/O operation (DeviceNet-compatible) that is the default setting for the  
CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
Special remote I/O: Remote I/O operations that enable using all the functions of 3G3FV-series Invert-  
ers, and accessing/setting for all parameters. (Special remote I/O operation is special for this product;  
they are not compatible with DeviceNet.)  
The default setting is for standard remote I/O operation, so it will be necessary to switch to either of the  
other types of remote I/O operation if desired. Switching the remote I/O operation involves the use of  
message communications. Refer to 5-2 Message Communications and 5-3 Switching Remote I/O Op-  
eration.  
H Basic Remote I/O  
Basic remote I/O is used for the standard DeviceNet configuration.  
D Outputs (SYSMAC PC to 3G3FV)  
Instance ID: 20 Dec (14 Hex)  
Byte number  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Fault  
Reset  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Wd n  
Rightmost  
0
Forward/  
stop  
Leftmost  
1
2
3
Wd n+1  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)  
Rotational speed reference (leftmost data)  
D Inputs (3G3FV to SYSMAC PC)  
Instance ID: 70 Dec (46 Hex)  
Byte number  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Wd m  
Rightmost  
0
During  
Fault  
forward  
run  
Leftmost  
1
2
3
Wd m+1  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)  
Rotational speed reference (leftmost data)  
Note 1. A shaded box indicate that the bit is not used.  
Note 2. The basic remote I/O operation is the same as those explained for standard remote I/O. (Ba-  
sic remote I/O restricts the operation of standard remote I/O.)  
H Standard Remote I/O  
Standard remote I/O is the default setting for the CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
D Outputs (SYSMAC PC to 3G3FV)  
Instance ID: 21 Dec (15 Hex)  
Byte number  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Net  
Reference Control  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Fault  
Reset  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Wd n  
Rightmost  
0
Net  
Reverse/  
stop  
Forward/  
stop  
Leftmost  
1
2
3
Wd n+1  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)  
Rotational speed reference (leftmost data)  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D Inputs (3G3FV to SYSMAC PC)  
Instance ID: 71 Dec (47 Hex)  
Byte number  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Reference Control  
Reference From Net From Net  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Fault  
Wd m  
Rightmost  
0
At  
Inverter  
Ready  
During  
reverse  
run  
During  
forward  
run  
Warning  
(minor  
fault)  
Leftmost  
1
2
3
Wd m+1  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Rotational speed monitor (rightmost data)  
Rotational speed monitor (leftmost data)  
Note A shaded box indicate that the bit is not used.  
H Special Remote I/O  
Special remote I/O enables using all the functions of 3G3FV-series Inverters, and accessing/setting all  
parameters.  
D Outputs (SYSMAC PC to 3G3FV)  
Instance ID: 100 Dec (64 Hex)  
Byte number  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Wd n  
0
1
2
3
4
Function code (write/read code)  
Register number, leftmost byte (register number assigned to various parameters, etc.)  
Register number, rightmost byte (register number assigned to various parameters, etc.)  
Register data, leftmost byte (data to write to specified register)  
Wd n+1  
Wd n+2  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Rightmost  
Register data, rightmost byte (data to write to specified register)  
D Inputs (3G3FV to SYSMAC PC)  
Instance ID: 150 Dec (96 Hex)  
Byte number  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Wd m  
0
1
2
3
4
Function code (returns transmitted code)  
Register number, leftmost byte (returns transmitted register number)  
Register number, rightmost byte (returns transmitted register number)  
Register data, leftmost byte (return transfer data amount or read data)  
Wd m+1  
Wd m+2  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Rightmost  
Register data, rightmost byte (return transfer data amount or read data)  
Note 1. Special remote I/O outputs and inputs are paired. When using special remote I/O, be sure to  
set them together.  
Note 2. Special remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set for  
this product.  
Note 3. The 16-bit data (register number and register data) is set using two words for each setting.  
Note 4. Be careful of the order of the leftmost and rightmost bytes of the 16-bit data. The order is re-  
versed from that of basic and standard remote I/O.  
Note 5. For details on special remote I/O operation, refer to 5-4 Special Remote I/O.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-2 Message Communications (DeviceNet Explicit Messages)  
There are two types of CompoBus/D communications: Remote I/O and message communications. This  
sections explains CompoBus/D Communications Card message communications. With message  
communications, specific instructions (SEND, RECV, CMND, and IOWR) are used for reading and writ-  
ing data between Master and Slave Units.  
5-2-1 Overview of Message Communications (Explicit Message  
Operations)  
H Message Communications Operations  
Message communications enable data to be exchanged as required between nodes (i.e., between  
Masters or between Masters and Slaves) on a CompoBus/D Network. For example, the accumulated  
data from a given PC can be read from another PC, and constants from various Slaves can be changed  
from a PC. To use message communications, however, both nodes involved in the data exchange must  
support message communications.  
C200
CVM
er  
Communications Card  
Note: T-branch wiring using Thin Cables  
H Types of Message Communications  
CompoBus/D message communications are broadly divided into the two categories described below.  
Of these two categories, the Inverters CompoBus/D Communications Card supports explicit mes-  
sages.  
Explicit Messages  
Explicit messages are defined by DeviceNet. The class, instance, and attribute are specified for  
executing message communications. The messages are the same for all Inverter products, so mes-  
sages can be exchanged in the same way with masters made by other manufacturers.  
FINS Messages  
Messages can be exchanged using FINS commands between CompoBus/D nodes (Masters and  
Slaves) that support FINS messages. (FINS commands are actually sent and received using Device-  
Net explicit messages.)  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Note Message communications are supported by CV-series and C200HX/HG/HE PCs, but not by  
C200HS PCs.  
H Overview of Explicit Messages  
Explicit messages are sent and received as described below. Basically explicit message communica-  
tions are executed in 1-byte (8-bit) units.  
Header  
Header  
Node address Service code Class  
Item  
Instance  
Content  
Attribute  
Data  
Footer  
The header indicates the beginning of an explicit message and that the frame is an  
explicit message request/response. It is set automatically for CompoBus/D  
(DeviceNet), so there is no particular need to be concerned with it.  
Node address  
Service code  
Request:  
Response:  
Set the node address of the Slave/Master to be requested.  
The node address of the responding Slave/Master is set.  
Request:  
Response:  
Set the code of the requested service (read/write, etc.).  
The MSB (most significant bit) of the requested service code is  
changed to 1and returned.  
Indicates the classification of a function  
defined by DeviceNet. To specify a function,  
specify these three codes.  
Class  
Function classification (major  
classification)  
Instance  
Attribute  
Data  
Instance classification (minor  
classification)  
Attribute (Set values are assigned  
for each function.)  
Request: Set the data to be written.  
Response: Read-requested data or fault message are attached.  
Footer  
This is the part that indicates the end of the explicit message and executes the  
CRC check. It is set automatically for CompoBus/D (DeviceNet), so there is no  
particular need to be concerned with it.  
5-2-2 Sending and Receiving Messages with C200HX/HG/HE  
PCs  
H Using IOWR  
With C200HX/HG/HE PCs, explicit messages are sent using IOWR. To send an explicit message, it is  
necessary to place FINS command 2801in front and to send the command to the Master Unit. The  
Master Unit that receives the command converts the command data to an explicit message and trans-  
fers it to the destination node. (When sending an explicit message, it is not possible to directly specify  
the destination node with IOWR.)  
(@)IOWR  
C
S
D
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D C: Control Code  
The control code is set as shown below for CompoBus/D Master Units.  
C:  
FE (Master Unit)  
or explicit messages.  
: 0 to 3F hex (0 to 63)  
dress must be set for explicit messages.  
Response setting:  
ON: No response.  
OFF: Response required.  
Must be OFF (response required) for explicit messages.  
D S: Beginning Source Word  
Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the CompoBus/D Master Unit.  
Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table.  
Bits  
Word address  
15 to 8  
7 to 0  
Beginning response storage word  
S
Set with the PCs variable area designation method.  
S+1  
S+2  
Example: DM 1000  
82 (DM area) 03E8 (1000 in hexadecimal)  
00 (fixed at 00 for DM area)  
Response monitor time:  
0000 hex 2 s  
0001 to 028F hex 0.1 to 65.5 s (unit: 0.1 s)  
S+3  
Number of command data bytes (Set in hexadecimal.)  
Note: Command data is the data set in words S+4 onwards.  
S+4  
S+5  
Command data (Set explicit message FINS command 2801.)  
Node of Slave or Master for transmission  
Address: 0 to 3F hex (0 to 63)  
Explicit message service code  
Write: 10 Read: 0E  
S+6  
S+7  
S+8  
Class ID code (Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function.)  
Set within 0001 to 002A (hex) with Inverters CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
Instance ID code (Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function.)  
Set within 0001 to 0003 (hex) with Inverters CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
Attribute ID code  
Attached data (for writing)  
(Set DeviceNet attribute code for relevant  
function.)  
---  
Attached data (for writing)  
D D: Destination Information  
D:  
words to transfer (001 to 128 BCD)  
s to transfer, including leading word S.  
umber of the Special Unit (0 to F hex, 0 to 15)  
Set the unit number of the Master Unit.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Message Timing  
The Message Communications Enabled Flag must be used as an execution condition for the Master  
when IOWR is used. Be sure this flag is ON before executing IOWR. If IOWR is executed when this flag  
is OFF, a Special I/O Unit error may be generated for the Master.  
Message  
Communications  
Enabled Flag  
Execution  
condition  
A
(@) IOWR  
C
S
D
B
B
A
25506  
Equals Flag  
1. IOWR is executed when the execution condition is met and the Message Communications Enabled  
Flag is ON.  
2. When IOWR is executed, it is self-held by bit B.  
3. When IOWR is completed, the Equals Flag turns ON and the self-holding bit is cleared.  
Note 1. If IOWR ends in an error, the Equals Flag will not turn ON, so the self-holding bit will remain  
ON.  
Note 2. The Equals Flag is also affected by the execution of other instructions, so be careful not to use  
any other such instructions between IOWR and the Equals Flag.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Timing of Message Response Reading  
Responses are read when the Message Communications Enabled Flag turns ON in the next cycle. The  
Message Communications Enabled Flag will turn OFF when a Master Unit is executing message com-  
munications. If the message response is faster than the PC ladder program cycle time, the Message  
Communications Enabled Flag will remain ON and response processing will not be possible. Execute  
the read response processing before IOWR, as shown in the following diagram, and produce a Mes-  
sage Communications Status Flag (d) using bit A.  
A
DIFU C  
C
SET D  
D
Read response  
processing  
Message  
Communications  
Enabled Flag  
RSET D  
Execution Message  
condition Communications  
A
Enabled Flag  
(@) IOWR  
B
C
S
D
B
A
25506  
Equals Flag  
Note If the read response processing is executed after IOWR, there can be no Message Communica-  
tions Enabled Flag response by means of IOWR, so an attempt could be made to read the re-  
sponse even though the message communications have not been completed.  
H Communications Flags  
Flag  
Functions  
Equals Flag (SR 25506)  
The Equals Flag turns OFF when an error occurs in writing a command  
from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit.  
This Flag turns ON after a command has been written normally from the  
CPU Unit to the Master Unit.  
Error Flag (SR25503)  
The Error Flag is OFF when all operands and the control code are legal.  
This Flag turns ON when an illegal operand or control code is set or  
when there is an error in instruction execution.  
Message Communications  
The Communications Enabled Flag turns OFF during messages  
Enabled Flag in the Master Unit communications or when message communications are not possible.  
status area (bit 12 in IR 101 +  
10 x unit No.)  
This Flag is ON when message communications are possible.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-2-3 SYSMAC CV-series Message Transmission  
H Using CMND(194)  
With CV-series PCs, CMND(194) is used to send explicit messages. To send an explicit message, it is  
necessary to place FINS command 2801in front and to send the command to the Master Unit. The  
Master Unit that receives the command converts the command data to an explicit message and trans-  
fers it to the destination node. When sending an explicit message, it is not possible to directly specify the  
destination node with CMND(194).  
(194)  
CMND  
S
D
C
D S: Beginning Command Storage Word  
Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the CompoBus/D Master Unit.  
Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table.  
Bits  
Word address  
15 to 8  
Command data (Set explicit message FINS command 2801.)  
7 to 0  
S
S+1  
S+2  
S+3  
S+4  
Node of Slave or Master for transmission  
Address: 0 to 3F hex (0 to 63)  
Explicit message service code  
Write: 10 Read: 0E  
Class ID code (Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function.)  
Set within 0001 to 002A (hex) with Inverters CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
Instance ID code (Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function.)  
Set within 0001 to 0003 (hex) with Inverters CompoBus/D Communications Card.  
Attribute ID code  
(Set DeviceNet attribute code for relevant  
function.)  
Attached data (for writing)  
---  
Attached data (for writing)  
D D: Beginning Response Storage Word  
Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing responses to messages.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D C: Beginning Control Code Word  
Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing the required control codes for message com-  
munications. The control codes shown in the following table are required by CompoBus/D Master Units.  
Preset the data in consecutive words.  
Bits  
Word address  
15  
14 to 8  
7 to 0  
C
Number of command data bytes: 0000 to 00A0 hex (0 to 160 bytes)  
Set the amount of data from the beginning S word.  
C+1  
C+2  
Number of response data bytes: 0001 to 00A0 hex (0 to 160 bytes)  
Set the size of the data storage area from the beginning D word.  
Network address: 0001 to 007F hex (1 to 127)  
When using CMND(194) with the CV Series, a network address must be set for each  
CompoBus/D Master Unit. The network address is edited using the routing table edit  
function of a Peripheral Device (except for the Programming Console).  
C+3  
C+4  
C+5  
Command destination node address: 00 to  
3F hex (0 to 63)  
Node address of the Master Unit  
Command destination Unit address  
Set Master Unit (FE) or Master Units unit  
number, 10 to 1F hex (0 to 15).  
Response Communications port no.: 0 to 7 Number of retries: 00 to 0F hex (0 to 15)  
Set the number of times to resend for error  
response.  
Response monitor time:  
0000 hex 2 s  
0001 to 028F hex 0.1 to 65.5 s (unit: 0.1 s)  
Set at least 2 seconds for explicit messages.  
Note Set 0in word C+4 bit 15 to require a response or 1to not require a response. Responses are  
required for explicit messages, so set 0.”  
H Message Timing  
When executing CMND(194), an AND condition must be set that requires both the PCs Network Com-  
munications Enabled Flag and the Master Units Message Communications Enabled Flag to be ON.  
Network Communications  
Enabled Flag  
(194)  
CMND  
S
D
C
Execution condition  
Message Communications  
Enabled Flag  
H Message Response Read Timing  
Have messages read with the rising edge of the Network Communications Enabled Flag for each com-  
munications port.  
Network Communications  
Enabled Flag  
Response read  
processing  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Communications Flags  
Address  
Word  
A502  
Type  
Name  
Content  
Bit  
SYSMAC  
PC flags  
Network Communications  
Enabled Flag  
7: Port 7  
6: Port 6  
5: Port 5  
4: Port 4  
3: Port 3  
2: Port 2  
1: Port 1  
0: Port 0  
0: Execution disabled (executing)  
1: Execution enabled (not executing)  
Network Communications  
Error Flag  
A502  
15: Port 7 0: Normal end  
14: Port 6  
1: Abnormal end  
13: Port 5  
12: Port 4  
11: Port 3  
10: Port 2  
9: Port 1  
8: Port 0  
Master Unit Message Communications 25 x Unit  
12  
0: Communications error detected;  
Master Unit message communica-  
tions not possible.  
status flag  
Enabled Flag  
number +  
1501  
1: Master Unit communications pos-  
sible.  
5-2-4 Overview of Messages and Responses  
When message communications are used, the Inverters CompoBus/D Communications Card returns  
responses as explained below.  
Basically, CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) communications are executed in 1-byte (8-bit) units. In the case of  
single-word data (16 bits), the rightmost bits (least significant) and the leftmost bits (most significant)  
are reversed in order due to the following reasons:  
Data on communications line is transmitted in the order of rightmost bits and leftmost bits.  
Data that is internally processed by PC for issuing commands is transmitted in the order of leftmost bits  
and rightmost bits.  
Therefore, reverse the order for attributes where Wordis written in the Sizecolumn in the tables on  
subsequent pages and create attached data or read response data.  
Note There is no need to take this into consideration for remote I/O because the rightmost bits and  
leftmost bits are automatically reversed.  
H Command Format  
28  
01  
32 bytes max.  
Command code  
(FINS command for PC)  
Destination  
node address code  
Service  
Instance ID  
Class ID  
Service data (attribute No. or at-  
tribute No. and write data)  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
H Response Format  
Chapter 5  
D Normal Response  
28  
01  
00  
00  
32 bytes max.  
Command code  
(FINS command for PC)  
Number of bytes  
transmitted  
Completion code  
Destination Service  
node address code  
Service data (read data)  
D Error Response  
28  
01  
00  
00  
94  
2 bytes  
Error code  
Completion code  
Number of bytes  
transmitted  
Command code  
(FINS command for PC)  
Destination  
node address code  
Service  
D Failure or Timeout During Transmission  
28  
01  
Completion code  
(FINS error code)  
Command code  
(FINS command for PC)  
5-2-5 Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex  
This and subsequent sections provide details on objects. There are eight types of :  
Identify objects (identification information): Class 01 hex  
Message router objects: Class 02 hex  
DeviceNet objects: Class 03 hex  
Assembly objects: Class 04 hex  
DeviceNet connection objects: Class 05 hex  
Motor data objects: Class 28  
Control supervisor objects: Class 29 hex  
AC/DC drive objects: Class 2A hex  
The three types of objects related to Inverters are the motor data, control supervisor, and AC/DC drive  
objects. These are explained below and in subsequent sections. The other types of objects are used  
less frequently, and covered in 8-2 Objects.  
Motor data objects are data and functions related to motors connected to Inverters. The motors that can  
be connected to Inverters are squirrel-cage inductive motors, so the Motor Typeis always 7.The  
motors rated current and rated voltage can be set and read.  
H Support Service Code  
Service Code No. (Hex)  
Service  
0E  
10  
Get attribute single  
Set attribute single  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Object Details  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting range Default  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
No  
Size  
00  
01  
Object Software Indicates class 28 software  
---  
0001  
Word  
Revision  
revisions. The revision value is  
advanced whenever there is a  
change.  
01  
03  
06  
Motor Type  
Indicates the type of motor to be  
used. The setting for a  
squirrel-cage inductive motor is 7.  
---  
07  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
Motor Rated  
Current  
The motors rated current can be  
set and read. The setting unit is  
0.1 A. (The setting unit can be  
changed using the current scale  
in Class 2A, Instance 1, Attribute  
17.)  
Inverter rated  
output current note 1.  
10% to 120%  
See  
Yes  
Word  
07  
Motor Rated  
Voltage  
The motors rated voltage can be  
set and read. The setting unit is 1 (0 to 510 V)  
0 to 255 V  
00C8  
(0190)  
Yes  
Yes  
Word  
V. (The setting unit can be  
changed using the voltage scale  
in Class 2A, Instance 1, Attribute  
1B.)  
See note 2.  
See  
note 2.  
Note 1. The default setting for the motors rated current depends on the Inverter model.  
Example: 1.90A (0013 hex) for 200-V class, 0.4 kW  
Note 2. The figures enclosed in parentheses in the Setting rangeand Defaultcolumns are the val-  
ues for 400-V class Inverters.  
5-2-6 Control Supervisor Objects: Class 29 Hex  
Control supervisor objects are objects that have Inverter control I/O-related functions. They are as-  
signed according to their particular control I/O functions, such as forward operation, reverse operation,  
error detection, and so on. Be careful when setting up a remote I/O communications connection. These  
functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I/O, so even if they have been set for mes-  
sage operations they may get rewritten for remote I/O.  
H Support Service Codes  
Service Code No. (Hex)  
Service  
0E  
10  
05  
Get attribute single  
Set attribute single  
Reset attribute  
Turns OFF the Forward Operation and Reverse Operation inputs and turns  
ON the Fault Reset. Then turns OFF the Fault Reset when Inverter Ready  
is output.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Object Details  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
Size  
00  
01  
01  
Object Software  
Revision  
Indicates class 29 software  
revisions. The revision value is  
advanced whenever there is a  
change.  
---  
0001  
No  
Word  
03  
04  
05  
Forward/Stop  
Reverse/Stop  
00: Stop  
00, 01  
00, 01  
00, 01  
00  
00  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
01: Forward operation  
00: Stop  
01: Reverse operation  
Net Control  
Local/remote switch  
00: Operate by b102 setting.  
01: Operate by CompoBus/D with  
b102 set to 3.”  
Set note 1.  
06  
07  
State  
Inverter status  
03 hex: Inverter ready  
---  
03  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
During forward run  
00: No Inverter output or operating ---  
in reverse.  
01: Forward operation or DC  
braking  
Turns ON even for DC braking  
during reverse operation.  
08  
09  
During reverse run  
Inverter Ready  
00: No Inverter output or operating ---  
in forward.  
01: Operating in reverse (reverse  
operation output status)  
00  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
Becomes 00with DC braking.  
00: Preparing  
---  
Initial processing/ not drive mode/  
fault  
01: Inverter ready  
Inverter can receive run  
command.  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
Fault  
00: Normal  
01: Fault  
---  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Word  
Warning (minor fault)  
Fault Reset  
Fault code  
00: Normal  
01: Warning (minor fault)  
---  
00  
00: Normal status  
01: Fault reset  
00, 01  
00  
Indicates the contents of fault that ---  
occur. (See the fault code list on  
the following page.)  
0000  
0F  
Control From Net  
Run signal input  
status  
00: Operating by b102 setting.  
01: Operating by CompoBus/D.  
---  
00  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
See note 1.  
10  
11  
12  
DeviceNet Fault  
mode  
02: Makers specifications  
---  
02  
00  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
See note 2.  
Force Fault/Trip  
00: Normal operation  
01: Communications external fault  
input (according to parameter F9 )  
00, 01  
---  
Communications  
external fault input  
Force Status  
00: Normal status  
01: Communications external fault  
detected. (Inverter stopped with  
fault detection.)  
Communications  
external fault input  
status  
Note 1. The Net Control and Control From Net functions are applicable for Inverter software versions  
S1042 and later. Cannot be changed during running. Check the version with the Inverter mon-  
itor function U114. If the software version is S1040, set b102 to 3.”  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Note 2. A DeviceNet Fault mode cannot be set from communications. The Inverter will stop when a  
communications fault is detected. In versions S1042 and later, the fault processing method  
can be selected with an Inverter parameter (F906).  
D Fault Codes  
DeviceNet error code  
0000  
Operator display  
Meaning  
---  
Inverter normal  
Ground fault  
2120  
2130  
2200  
2220  
2221  
2222  
2300  
3130  
GF  
SC  
Short circuit  
OL2  
OL1  
OL3  
OL4  
OC  
Inverter overload  
Motor overload  
Overtorque detection 1  
Overtorque detection 2  
Overcurrent  
PF  
Input phase loss  
LF  
Output phase loss  
3210  
3220  
3222  
4200  
4210  
5110  
5120  
5300  
6320  
7110  
7112  
7301  
7310  
OV  
Main circuit overvoltage  
Undervoltage (main)  
Undervoltage (MC)  
Overheat  
UV1  
UV3  
OH  
OH1  
UV2  
PUF  
OPR  
ERR  
RR  
Overheat  
Control power supply fault  
Fuse open  
Operator disconnection  
EEPROM write failure  
Braking transistor failure  
Braking resistor overheating  
PG is disconnected  
Overspeed  
RH  
PGO  
OS  
DEV  
BUS  
EF3  
EF4  
EF5  
EF6  
EF7  
EF8  
FF0  
Speed deviation  
7500  
9000  
Communications error  
External fault (Terminal 3)  
External fault (Terminal 4)  
External fault (Terminal 5)  
External fault (Terminal 6)  
External fault (Terminal 7)  
External fault (Terminal 8)  
Communications external fault  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-2-7 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex  
AC/DC drive objects are assigned to command-related functions for drive devices such as Inverters  
and Servomotors. Command-related data reading and writing, monitor data reading, set data scale  
changes, and so on, are all enabled. These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote  
I/O, so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I/O.  
H Support Service Codes  
Service Code No. (Hex)  
Service  
0E  
10  
Get attribute single  
Set attribute single  
H Object Details  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default Read Write Size  
00  
01  
01  
Object Software  
Revision  
Indicates class 2A software revisions. The  
revision value is advanced whenever there  
is a change.  
---  
0001  
Yes  
No  
Word  
03  
04  
At Reference  
00: Stopped, accelerating or decelerating  
01: At reference 1  
---  
00  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
Net Reference  
(See note 1.)  
00: Operate at B101 setting.  
01: Set B101 to 3and operate with  
CompoBus/D.  
00, 01  
Yes  
06  
07  
Drive Mode  
00: Open loop vector (A102 = 2)  
01: V/f control (A102 = 0)  
02: V/f control with PG (A102 = 1)  
03: Flux vector (A102 = 3)  
00 to 03  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
Speed Actual  
Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the ---  
output frequency monitor (U102)  
minimum unit as 1.  
0000  
Word  
Rotational Speed  
Monitor  
The output frequency monitor minimum  
unit can be set by the frequency reference  
setting and display units (o103).  
o103= 0: 0.01 Hz  
(See note 1.)  
o103= 1: 0.01% (100%: Max. frequency.)  
o103= 2 to 39: 1 r/min (Set number of  
poles.)  
o103= 40 to 39999: Follow individual set  
values.  
Setting the attribute 16 speed scale  
enables a further multiplication factor to be  
set for o103= 2 to 39: 1 r/min.  
08  
Speed Reference Can be set and read in hexadecimal with  
0 to max. 0000  
frequency  
Yes  
Yes  
Word  
the frequency reference minimum unit as  
Rotational Speed  
1.  
Reference  
The frequency reference minimum unit can  
(See note 1.)  
be set by the frequency reference setting  
and display units (o103).  
o103= 0: 0.01 Hz  
o103= 1: 0.01% (100%: Max. frequency.)  
o103= 2 to 39: 1 r/min (Set number of  
poles.)  
o103= 40 to 39999: Follow individual set  
values.  
Setting the attribute 16 speed scale  
enables a further multiplication factor to be  
set for o103= 2 to 39: 1 r/min.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default Read Write Size  
01  
09  
0F  
10  
11  
Current Actual  
Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the ---  
output current monitor (U103) minimum  
unit as 0.1 A.  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Word  
Word  
Word  
Word  
Setting the attribute 17 current scale  
enables a multiplication factor to be set.  
Power Actual  
Input Voltage  
Output Voltage  
Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the ---  
output power monitor (U108) minimum  
unit as 1 W.  
Setting the attribute 1A power scale  
enables a multiplication factor to be set.  
Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the ---  
input voltage setting (E101) minimum unit  
as 1 V.  
Setting the attribute 1B voltage scale  
enables a multiplication factor to be set.  
Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the ---  
output voltage monitor (U106) minimum  
unit as 1 V.  
Setting the attribute 1B voltage scale  
enables a multiplication factor to be set.  
Can be set and read in hexadecimal with  
the acceleration time 1 (C101) and  
deceleration time 1 (C102) minimum unit  
as 1 ms.  
0.0 to  
12  
13  
14  
Accel Time  
2710  
Hex  
(10.0 s)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Word  
Word  
Word  
6,000.0 ×  
3
10 ms  
(0.00 to  
600.00 ×  
Depending on the acceleration/  
deceleration time unit (C101) setting,  
numbers below 100 ms or 10 ms are  
truncated.  
3
10 ms)  
Decel Time  
2710  
Hex  
(10.0 s)  
Setting the attribute 1C time scale enables  
a multiplication factor to be set.  
Can be set and read in hexadecimal with  
the frequency reference lower limit (d202)  
and the frequency reference upper limit  
(d201) minimum unit as 1 ms.  
Low Speed Limit  
0 to  
0000  
109% of  
maximum  
frequency  
(See note 1 and  
3.)  
The minimum unit can be set by the  
frequency reference setting and display  
units (o103).  
15  
16  
High Speed Limit  
0 to 110% 0708  
of Hex  
maximum (1,800  
frequency r/min)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Word  
Byte  
o103= 2 to 39: 1 r/min  
o103= Other than above: 0.1% (Maximum  
frequency: 100%)  
(See note 1 and  
3.)  
Setting the attribute 16 speed scale  
enables a multiplication factor to be set for  
o103= 2 to 39: 1 r/min.  
Speed scale  
Speed data unit selection can be set and  
read. The speed data unit value is  
calculated as follows:  
15 to 15 00  
(F1 to 0F  
hex)  
a
Unit = 1 [r/min] x 1/2  
a: Speed scale set value  
Set a negative value as its 2s  
complement.  
17  
Current scale  
Current data unit selection can be set and  
read. The current data unit value is  
calculated as follows:  
15 to 15 00  
(F1 to 0F  
hex)  
Yes  
Yes  
Byte  
b
Unit = 0.1 [A] x 1/2  
b: Current scale set value  
Set a negative value as its 2s  
complement.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Instance Attribute  
01  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default Read Write Size  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
Power scale  
Power data unit selection can be set and  
read. The power data unit value is  
calculated as follows:  
15 to 15 00  
(F1 to 0F  
hex)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
c
Unit = 0.1 [W] x 1/2  
c: Power scale set value  
Set a negative value as its 2s  
complement.  
Voltage scale  
Voltage data unit selection can be set and  
read. The voltage data unit value is  
calculated as follows:  
15 to 15 00  
(F1 to 0F  
hex)  
d
Unit = 0.1 [V] x 1/2  
d: Voltage scale set value  
Set a negative value as its 2s  
complement.  
Time scale  
Time data unit selection can be set and  
read. The time data unit value is calculated (F1 to 0F  
15 to 15 00  
as follows:  
hex)  
e
Unit = 0.1 [V] x 1/2  
e: Voltage scale set value  
Set a negative value as its 2s  
complement.  
Reference From  
Net  
00: Operate at B101 setting.  
01: Set B101 to 3and operate with  
CompoBus/D.  
---  
00  
Note 1. The Net Reference and Reference From Net functions are applicable for Inverter software  
versions S1042 and later. Cannot be changed during running. Check the version with the In-  
verter monitor function U114. If the software version is S1040, set b101 to 3.”  
Note 2. Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is always r/min. The number of  
motor poles (2 to 32) must be set in parameter o103 (frequency reference setting and dis-  
play units) when using DeviceNet (open network).  
Note 3. Cannot be changed during running.  
D Communications Data Setting Examples  
Example 1: Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following  
conditions set.  
Number of poles (o103): 4  
Speed scale (attribute 16): 0  
Converting frequency to rotational speed:  
Frequency x 120 / number of poles = 60 x 120/4 = 1,800 r/min  
Converting rotational speed to minimum unit:  
Rotational speed / unit = 1,800 / (1 r/min x 1/20) = 1,800  
Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 1,800 (dec) = 708 (hex)  
Example 2: Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following  
condition set.  
Frequency setting (o103): 0 (Cannot be set with DeviceNet protocol.)  
Converting frequency to minimum setting unit:  
Frequency / minimum unit = 60 / 0.01 = 6,000  
Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 6,000 (dec) = 1,770 (hex)  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Note With frequency, the speed scale has no effect.  
Example 3: Finding the communications data for setting a one-minute acceleration time with the follow-  
ing condition set.  
Time scale (attribute 1C): 3  
Matching the acceleration time unit: 1 minute = 60 seconds = 60,000 ms  
Converting acceleration time to minimum unit:  
Acceleration time / unit = 60,000 / (1 ms x 1/23) = 7,500  
Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 7,500 (dec) = 1D4C (hex)  
D Communications Data Reference Example  
In this example, the hexadecimal value BB8 that has been read is converted to frequency with the fol-  
lowing conditions set.  
Number of poles (o103): 4  
Speed scale (attribute 16): 1  
Converting communications data to decimal:  
BB8 (hex) = 3,000 (dec)  
Converting from minimum unit to r/min:  
Communications data x unit = 3,000 x (1 r/min x 1/21) = 1,500 (r/min)  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-3 Switching Remote I/O Operation  
To use remote I/O operations other than the standard remote I/O operation it is necessary to switch the  
remote I/O operation. There are two ways to switch:  
Use the Configurator to set the remote I/O instance IDs for parameter objects.  
Set the remote I/O instance IDs for connection objects.  
When an OMRON Master Unit is used, however, only the method utilizing the Configurator can be used  
to switch remote I/O operations.  
Note OMRON Master Units assume that communications will use remote I/O, so remote I/O commu-  
nications are executed when the power is turned ON. Remote I/O operations cannot be switched  
during operation under DeviceNet protocol. If remote I/O operations need to be switched, it must  
be done by using the Configurator with the Master Units power supply turned OFF.  
H Switching via Parameter Objects (Using the Configurator)  
To switch remote I/O operations using parameter objects, the appropriate instance IDs must be set for  
the following parameter objects.  
Switching remote I/O inputs (3G3FV to SYSMAC PC):  
Class 100 dec (64 hex), Instance 01 dec (01 hex), Attribute 202 dec (CA hex)  
Switching remote I/O outputs (SYSMAC PC to 3G3FV)  
Class 100 dec (64 hex), Instance 01 dec (01 hex), Attribute 203 dec (CB hex)  
The instances to be set are shown in the following table.  
Instance ID  
Remote I/O type  
Inputs (3G3FV to PC)  
70 Dec (46 hex)  
Outputs (PC to 3G3FV)  
20 Dec (14 hex)  
Basic remote I/O  
Standard remote I/O  
Special remote I/O  
71 Dec (47 hex)  
150 Dec (96 hex)  
21 Dec (15 hex)  
100 Dec (64 hex)  
The procedure for switching remote I/O operations by means of object parameters is as follows:  
1. Connect the 3G3FV Inverter and a Configurator to the CompoBus/D communications network. At  
least a 3G3FV CompoBus/D Communications Card and a Configurator must be connected.  
2. Set up the explicit message connection with no remote communications.  
S Turn ON the power to the Configurator and the 3G3FV CompoBus/D Communications Card and  
press the Configurators online button. Do not turn ON the power to the Master Unit at this time.  
This will put the system into online status.  
S Click the Device List button at the upper left corner of the Configurator screen. With this, the explic-  
it message connection will be set up.  
3. Connect the remote I/O to be used for the parameter objects.  
S Select Tool (T) and then Device Parameter Setting (P) from the Configurator tool bar to display the  
parameter setting tool.  
S Set the node address, and then set the remote I/O instance IDs for the parameter objects de-  
scribed above (attributes CA and CB hex of class 64 hex, instance 01 hex).  
4. Cut off the Configurator and explicit message connection by turning OFF the power to the Inverter.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5. Set up the Master Unit and 3G3FV Inverter connection by turning ON their power. The remote I/O  
connection will then start up with the specified remote I/O operation.  
When creating scan lists, set the scan list to disable mode once and then create scan lists or change  
the settings as follows for the Inverter I/O allocation byte number from the Configurator.  
S Basic/Standard remote I/O: 4 bytes (both for OUT and IN)  
S Special remote I/O: 4 bytes (both for OUT and IN)  
H Switching via Connection Objects  
This method is defined by OVDA AC/DC drive objects.  
Connection Objects for Switching Remote I/O Operations  
To switch remote I/O operations by this method, the appropriate instance IDs must be set for the follow-  
ing connection objects.  
Switching remote I/O inputs (3G3FV to SYSMAC PC):  
Produced connection path (Class 05 hex, Instance 02 hex, Attribute 14 hex)  
Switching remote I/O outputs (SYSMAC PC to 3G3FV)  
Consumed connection path (Class 05 hex, Instance 02 hex, Attribute 16 hex)  
Remote I/O Instance ID  
The instances to be set are shown in the following table.  
Instance ID  
Remote I/O type  
Inputs (3G3FV to PC)  
70 Dec (46 hex)  
Outputs (PC to 3G3FV)  
20 Dec (14 hex)  
Basic remote I/O  
Standard remote I/O  
Special remote I/O  
71 Dec (47 hex)  
150 Dec (96 hex)  
21 Dec (15 hex)  
100 Dec (64 hex)  
Restrictions on Switching Remote I/O  
To switch remote I/O operations, maintain either of the following conditions and send an explicit mes-  
sage.  
Remote I/O communications stopped after the remote I/O connection and explicit message connec-  
tion have been established.  
Remote I/O connection allocated after explicit message connection has been established.  
Note The Configurator and OMRON Master Unit cannot create these conditions, so they cannot set  
connection objects.  
Data Setting Example  
The set data must be converted to signal segments as defined by DeviceNet and then transferred. For  
example, when remote I/O inputs are converted to special remote I/O inputs (instance ID: 96 hex), the  
set data is as follows:  
7
0
0
0
7
0
0
1
7
0
0
0
=62 39 36 Hex  
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
9in ASCII code  
6in ASCII code  
Instance ID set as ASCII code  
Number of subsequent bytes (2 bytes)  
Header showing signal segment (011)  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Note For details on using message communications, refer to 5-2 Message Communications (Device-  
Net Explicit Messages and the operation manual for the Master Unit being used.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-4 Special Remote I/O Operation  
There are three kinds of CompoBus/D remote I/O operation: Basic remote I/O, standard remote I/O (the  
default setting), and special remote I/O. This section explains special remote I/O.  
Special remote I/O operation enables using all the functions of 3G3FV-series Inverters, and setting and  
reading all parameters. These operations have been developed independently, and are not part of the  
DeviceNet standard.  
5-4-1 Overview of Special Remote I/O  
Special remote I/O operations utilize CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) remote I/O, and can directly write to  
and read from internal Inverter registers. Basically, the register numbers for the various functions shown  
on this and subsequent pages are specified for writing or reading. Once data has been written, it is re-  
tained until it is changed by the next write operation.  
H Words Used for Special Remote I/O  
D Outputs (SYSMAC PC to 3G3FV)  
Instance ID: 100 Dec (64 Hex)  
Byte number  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Wd n  
0
1
2
3
4
Function code (write/read code)  
Register number leftmost byte (register number allocated to each parameter, etc.)  
Register number rightmost byte (register number allocated to each parameter, etc.)  
Register data leftmost byte (data to write to specified register)  
Wd n+1  
Wd n+2  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Rightmost  
Register data rightmost byte (data to write to specified register)  
D Outputs (3G3FV to SYSMAC PC)  
Instance ID: 150 Dec (96 Hex)  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Wd m  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
0
1
2
3
4
Function code (returns transmitted code)  
Register number leftmost byte (returns transmitted register number)  
Register number rightmost byte (returns transmitted register number)  
Wd m+1  
Wd m+2  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
Register data leftmost byte (returns transmitted data amount or reads data)  
Register data rightmost byte (returns transmitted data amount or reads data)  
Rightmost  
Note 1. Special remote I/O outputs and inputs are paired. When using special remote I/O, be sure to  
set them together.  
Note 2. Special remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set for  
this product.  
Note 3. The 16-bit data (register number and register data) is set in two words for each setting.  
H Function Codes  
The special remote I/O function codes are shown in the following table. Note that they are different from  
the explicit message service codes.  
Function code (hex)  
Content  
10  
03  
00  
Data writing  
Data reading  
No execution (data wrapping only; no internal  
processing takes place.)  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Setting Data for Operations and Parameter Constants  
Read data and write data to be set for operations and parameters are calculated as shown below and  
then transmitted in hexadecimal.  
Convert to hexadecimal values with the operation/parameter minimum setting value as 1.  
Negative numbers are expressed as twos complements.  
If the original data is already displayed in hexadecimal, it is transmitted as is.  
Example 1  
In this example, the frequency reference is 60 Hz, and the minimum setting unit is 0.01 Hz.  
60/0.01 = 6000 1770 hex  
Example 2  
In this example, 50% (minimum setting unit: 0.1%) is set for the frequency reference (voltage) terminal  
13 input bias.  
50/0.1 = 500 01F4 hex  
+1  
= FE0C hex  
Example 3  
In this example, 1F (hex)is set for multi-function inputs.  
1Fis transmitted.  
H Enabling Parameter Setting Data by Enter Command  
When setting (writing) data in parameter constants, be sure to send an enter command. After receiving  
the enter command, the Inverter will enable the data newly set in the parameter constants as operation  
data.  
When setting (writing) data in more than one parameter, send an enter command once after completing  
all the settings. All the parameters newly set before the enter command is sent will be enabled.  
Data type  
Transmission  
Inverter operation  
Remarks  
Enter command written in Function code: 10 hex  
When receiving an enter Applicable to all the  
EEPROM  
command, a series of  
parameter setting data  
will be stored in  
Inverter software.  
Register No.: FFFD hex  
Send data: 0000 hex  
EEPROM and enabled  
as operation data.  
Enter command not  
written in EEPROM  
Function code: 10 hex  
Register No.: FFDD hex  
Send data: 0000 hex  
When receiving an enter Applicable to Inverters  
command, a series of  
parameter setting data  
will be enabled without  
storing them in  
with software version of  
S1042 or later.  
EEPROM.  
All the set data will be  
cleared to the initial data  
when the power is turned  
OFF.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Note 1. Unless an enter command is transmitted, data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not  
start.  
Note 2. The enter command requires a parameter constant (Register No. 0100 or higher). Since the  
run command or frequency reference (Register No. 0000 to 000F) is stored only in the RAM  
area, set data will be enabled without an enter command.  
H Special Remote I/O Responses  
When data is written and read using special remote I/O, the responses shown in the following table are  
returned. Check that the input data and output data match when handling communications.  
Error code  
Content  
---  
Normal completion response  
The function code and register number at the time of transmission are placed at  
the beginning, and returned with the data amount (when data is written) or the  
read data (when data is read) attached.  
01  
02  
21  
Function code error  
An unsupported function code was received.  
Register number error  
An unregistered register number was received.  
Data setting error  
An upper or lower limit was exceeded, or a constant restriction was violated. (See  
note 2.)  
22  
24  
Writing mode error  
Either writing was executed during operation or during a CPU error, during UV, or  
writing was attempted to a read-only register.  
Busy  
Writing was attempted during constant processing.  
Note 1. When a communications error occurs, the function code MSB will be returned as 1.”  
Note 2. A constant restrictionis a restriction on OPE error detection.  
5-4-2 Special Remote I/O Communications Timing  
With special remote I/O communications, it is possible to use all of the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV functions,  
such as frequency setting, control input setting, error monitoring, output frequency monitoring, and so  
on. These functions are utilized by setting the register numbers and connecting to the various 3G3FV  
functions. To use these functions properly, be sure to use the following method to handle the data and  
provide a program for switching the communications processing.  
H Matching Function Codes and Register Numbers  
In the remote I/O outputs (SYSMAC PC to 3G3FV), set the function code, register number, and set  
data for the function to be executed.  
Compare (CMP) the function codes and register numbers of the set remote I/O outputs and the remote  
I/O inputs (3G3FV to SYSMAC PC). If they agree, proceed to the next process.  
Note If data is repeatedly written to the same register number, it cannot be handled. Be sure to keep  
performing processes with different function codes or register numbers. If it is necessary to write  
repeatedly to the same register number, then alternately write to and read from that register.  
(Handling data is made possible by changing function codes.)  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Handling Illustration  
10 hex  
03 hex  
10 hex  
03 hex  
Function code  
register number  
0000 hex  
0021 hex  
0001 hex  
0010 hex  
Processing  
contents  
Inverter run command writing  
Output frequency monitoring  
Inverter status reading  
Frequency reference writing  
Transmission  
completed signal  
Function coderesponse number comparison (CMP)  
5-4-3 Inputting Control/Frequency  
The Inverters various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table. For ex-  
ample, to set the frequency reference and begin operation, first set the reference value to the frequency  
reference register 0001,and then write the run command to the Inverters run command register  
0000.”  
Note 1. Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation.  
Note 2. The following registers are in RAM, so they are all cleared to zero when the Inverters power  
supply is turned OFF.  
Register No. (hex)  
0000  
Function  
Content  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
Yes  
Inverter run command  
Frequency reference  
(Refer to table below.)  
0001  
Sets frequency reference Yes  
value. (See note 1.)  
Yes  
Not used.  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
Multi-function analog out- +11 V = 02D6 hex  
put 1 (See note 2.)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0008  
0009  
Multi-function analog out- +11 V = 02D6 hex  
put 2 (See note 2.)  
Inverter output (See note (Refer to table below.)  
3.)  
Not used.  
000A  
000B  
000C  
000D  
000E  
000F  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D Inverter Run Commands: Register Number 0000 Hex  
Bit  
Content  
Forward/stop (1: Forward operation)  
Reverse/stop (1: Reverse operation)  
Multi-function input 1  
0
1
2
3
Multi-function input 2  
4
Multi-function input 3  
5
Multi-function input 4  
6
Multi-function input 5  
7
Multi-function input 6  
8 to 15  
Not used.  
D Inverter Outputs: Register Number 0009 Hex  
Bit  
Content  
Multi-function contact output (1: ON)  
Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)  
Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)  
Not used.  
0
1
2
8 to 15  
Note 1. The setting unit of the frequency reference can be changed in o103 (frequency reference  
setting and display units). The default setting is 0.01 Hz.  
Note 2. The multi-function analog output 1 and 2 registers can be used to set the Inverters analog  
outputs by means of communications. To do that, set 31 (1F hex)for H401 (multi-function  
analog output terminal 21 monitor selection) and H404 (multi-function analog output termi-  
nal 23 monitor selection).  
Note 3. The Inverters multi-function outputs can be turned from ON to OFF by means of communica-  
tions. To do that, set Ffor multi-function output parameters H201 (multi-function contact  
output: terminals 910 function selection), H201 (multi-function output 1: terminal 25 func-  
tion selection), and H203 (multi-function output 2: terminal 25 function selection).  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-4-4 Inverter Monitoring Functions  
All Inverter monitoring can be accessed. To read Inverter status, fault monitoring, alarm monitoring, I/O  
status monitoring, error log, etc., specify the register number from the following table and read the data.  
Register number (hex)  
Function  
Inverter status  
Content  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
0010  
0011  
0012  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
OPE error number  
No  
No  
No  
Operator status  
Yes  
Yes  
Operator setting error  
number  
0013  
Not used.  
Fault 1  
0014  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
Not used.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
0015  
Fault 2  
0016  
Fault 3  
0017  
CPF error 1  
CPF error 2  
Alarm 1  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
0018  
0019  
001A  
Alarm 2  
001B to 001F  
Not used.  
D Inverter Status: Register Number 0010 Hex  
Bit  
Content  
0
During RUN  
Zero speed  
1
2
Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)  
During Fault Reset input  
Frequency agree 1  
Inverter operation ready  
Alarm  
3
4
5
6
7
Fault  
8 to 15  
Not used.  
D Operator Status: Register Number 0011 Hex  
Bit  
Content  
0
1: Operation fault  
1: EEPROM error  
1: Program mode  
1
2
00: Operator connecting  
3
11: Operator disconnecting  
4
5 to 15  
Not used.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D Fault 1: Register Number 0014 Hex  
Bit  
Display  
PUF  
Content  
0
Fuse open  
1
UV1  
UV2  
UV3  
SC  
Undervoltage (main)  
Undervoltage (CTL)  
Undervoltage (MC)  
Short-circuit  
2
3
4
5
GF  
Ground fault  
6
OC  
Overcurrent  
7
OV  
Overvoltage  
8
OH  
Overheat (See note 1.)  
Overheat (See note 2.)  
Motor overload  
9
OH1  
OL1  
OL2  
OL3  
OL4  
RR  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Inverter overload  
Overtorque detection 1  
Overtorque detection 2  
Braking transistor  
Braking resistor  
RH  
Note 1. Maximum (upper limit) temperature was exceeded.  
Note 2. Set temperature was exceeded.  
D Fault 2: Register Number 0015 Hex  
Bit  
Display  
Content  
0
EF3  
EF4  
EF5  
EF6  
EF7  
EF8  
---  
External fault (3)  
External fault (4)  
External fault (5)  
External fault (6)  
External fault (7)  
External fault (8)  
Not used.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OS  
Overspeed  
8
DEV  
PGO  
PF  
Speed deviation  
PG is disconnected  
Input phase loss  
Output phase loss  
Not used.  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
LF  
---  
OPR  
ERR  
---  
OPR disconnected  
EEPROM error  
Not used.  
D Fault 3: Register Number 0016 Hex  
Bit  
Display  
Content  
0
1
---  
Not used.  
BUS  
---  
Communications error  
Not used.  
2 to 15  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D CPF Error 1: Register Number 0017  
Bit  
Display  
Content  
Not used.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
---  
---  
CPF02  
CPF03  
CPF04  
CPF05  
CPF06  
---  
Baseblock circuit error  
EEPROM error  
Internal A/D error (See note 1.)  
External A/D error (See note 2.)  
Option connect error  
Not used.  
7 to 15  
Note 1. CPU internal A/D converter error  
Note 2. CPU external A/D converter error  
D CPF Error 2: Register Number 0018 Hex  
Bit  
Display  
CPF20  
---  
Content  
Content  
0
Optional Card A/D error  
Not used.  
1 to 15  
D Alarm 1: Register Number 0019 Hex  
Bit  
Display  
0
UV  
OV  
OH  
Undervoltage (main)  
Overvoltage  
1
2
Overheat  
3
OH2  
OL3  
OL4  
EF  
External overheat 2  
Overtorque detection 1  
Overtorque detection 2  
4
5
6
Forward/reverse simultaneous input  
Baseblock  
7
BB  
8
EF3  
EF4  
EF5  
EF6  
EF7  
EF8  
---  
External fault (3)  
External fault (4)  
External fault (5)  
External fault (6)  
External fault (7)  
External fault (8)  
Not used.  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
OS  
Overspeed  
D Alarm 2: Register Number 001A Hex  
Bit  
Display  
DEV  
Content  
0
1
Speed deviation  
PG is disconnected  
Not used  
PGO  
---  
2 to 15  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Inverter Monitoring: U1–jj  
Register  
number  
Monitor  
number  
Monitored item  
Output unit  
Set in o1-03  
Read  
Write  
No  
0020  
U1-01  
Frequency reference  
Output frequency  
Output current  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0021  
0022  
U1-02  
U1-03  
Set in o1-03  
No  
No  
8192 dec = Inverter rated  
current  
0023  
0024  
0025  
0026  
0027  
0028  
0029  
U1-04  
U1-05  
U1-06  
U1-07  
U1-08  
U1-09  
U1-10  
Control method  
Motor speed  
Set in A1-02  
Set in o1-03  
0.1 V  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Output voltage  
Main circuit DC voltage  
Output power  
1 V  
0.1 kW  
0.1%  
Torque reference  
Input terminal status  
Bits 0 to 7 = terminals 1 to Yes  
8
002A  
002B  
002C  
002D  
002E  
002F  
0030  
0031  
U1-11  
U1-12  
U1-13  
U1-14  
U1-15  
U1-16  
U1-17  
U1-18  
Output terminal status  
Operating status  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
1 hour  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Elapsed time  
FLASH ID software No.  
Terminal 13 level  
---  
0.1% (100% = 10 V)  
0.1% (100% = 20 mA)  
0.1% (100% = 10 V)  
Terminal 14 level  
Terminal 16 level  
Motor secondary current  
0.1% (100%: Motor rated  
current)  
0032  
0033  
0034  
0035  
0036  
0037  
0039  
003A  
003B  
U1-19  
U1-20  
U1-21  
U1-22  
U1-23  
U1-24  
U1-26  
U1-27  
U1-28  
Motor excitation current  
0.1% (100%: Motor rated  
current)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Output frequency after a  
soft start  
Set in o1-03  
Input to speed control loop 0.01% (100%: Maximum  
frequency)  
Output from speed control 0.1% (100%: Motor rated  
loop  
current)  
Speed deviation  
0.01% (100%: Maximum  
frequency)  
PID feedback  
0.01% (100%: Maximum  
frequency)  
Voltage reference for  
secondary current  
0.1 V  
0.1 V  
---  
Voltage reference for  
excitation current  
CPU ID  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D Output Terminal Status: Register Number 002A Hex  
Bit  
Content  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1: Terminal 9 and 10 short  
1: Terminal 25 and 27 short  
1: Terminal 26 and 27 short  
Not used.  
1: Terminal 18 and 20 short  
Not used.  
8 to 15  
D Operating Status: Register Number 002B Hex  
Bit  
Content  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
During RUN  
Zero speed  
Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)  
During Fault Reset input  
Frequency agree 1  
Operation ready  
Alarm  
Fault  
8 to 15  
Not used.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
H Inverter Monitoring: U2jj, U3jj  
Register  
number  
Monitor  
number  
Monitored item  
Output unit  
Read  
Write  
No  
0080  
U2-01  
Current fault  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
Set in o103.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0081  
0082  
0083  
0084  
U2-02  
U2-03  
U2-04  
U2-05  
Last fault  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Fault frequency reference  
Fault output reference  
Fault output current  
Set in o103.  
8192 dec = Inverter rated  
current  
0085  
0086  
U2-06  
U2-07  
Fault motor speed  
Set in o103.  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Fault output voltage  
reference  
0.1 V  
0087  
U2-08  
Fault main circuit DC  
voltage  
1 V  
Yes  
No  
0088  
0089  
008A  
U2-09  
U2-10  
U2-11  
Fault output power  
0.1 kW  
0.1%  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Fault torque reference  
Fault input terminal status Bits 0 to 7 = terminals 1 to Yes  
8
008B  
008C  
U2-12  
U2-13  
Fault output terminal status (Same as for U111 on  
Yes  
No  
No  
previous page.)  
Fault operating status  
(Same as for U112 on  
previous page.)  
Yes  
008D  
0090  
0091  
0092  
0093  
0094  
U2-14  
U3-01  
U3-02  
U3-03  
U3-04  
U3-05  
Fault elapsed time  
1 hour  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Content of last fault  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
(Refer to table below.)  
1 hour  
Content of 2nd prior fault  
Content of 3rd prior fault  
Content of 4th prior fault  
Elapsed time since last  
fault  
0095  
0096  
0097  
U3-06  
U3-07  
U3-08  
Elapsed time since 2nd  
prior fault  
1 hour  
1 hour  
1 hour  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Elapsed time since 3rd  
prior fault  
Elapsed time since 4th  
prior fault  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D Error Codes  
Code  
Display  
PUF  
Content  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
Fuse open  
UV1  
UV2  
UV3  
SC  
Undervoltage (main)  
Undervoltage (CTL)  
Undervoltage (MC)  
Short-circuit  
GF  
Ground fault  
OC  
Overcurrent  
OV  
Overvoltage  
OH  
Overheat (See note 1.)  
Overheat (See note 2.)  
Motor overload  
OH1  
OL1  
OL2  
OL3  
OL4  
RR  
Inverter overload  
Overtorque detection 1  
Overtorque detection 2  
Braking transistor  
Braking resistor  
RH  
EF3  
EF4  
EF5  
EF6  
EF7  
EF8  
---  
External fault (Terminal 3)  
External fault (Terminal 4)  
External fault (Terminal 5)  
External fault (Terminal 6)  
External fault (Terminal 7)  
External fault (Terminal 8)  
Not used.  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
OS  
Overspeed  
DEV  
PGO  
PF  
Speed deviation  
PG is disconnected  
Input phase loss  
Output phase loss  
Not used.  
LF  
---  
OPR  
ERR  
---  
OPR disconnected  
EEPROM error  
21 to FF  
Not used.  
Note 1. Maximum (upper limit) temperature was exceeded.  
Note 2. Set temperature was exceeded.  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
5-4-5 Parameter Constant Reading and Writing  
The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV-series Inverter parameter constant numbers and the  
corresponding register numbers. Write and read the various parameter constants with 1as the mini-  
mum setting unit. Negative numbers are expressed as twos complement. If the setting unit is in hexade-  
cimal, there is no need to convert it.  
When writing data in parameter constants, be sure to send an enter command to enable the written  
data. Unless the enter command is transmitted, the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not  
start.  
H Constants for Initialize Mode  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
A1-00  
A1-01  
A1-02  
Display Language  
Access Level  
0100  
0101  
0102  
1
1
1
0, 1  
1
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0 to 4  
0 to 3  
2
2
Select Control  
Method  
A1-03  
A1-04  
A1-05  
Initialize  
0103  
0104  
1
1
1
0 to 3,330  
0 to 9,999  
0 to 9,999  
0
0
0
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Password  
Setting the Password 0105  
H Parameter Constants for Program Mode  
D Application (b) Parameter Constants  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
ter No. unit  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
b1-01  
Frequency Reference 0180  
Selection  
1
0 to 3  
1
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
b1-02  
b1-03  
Run Source Selection 0181  
1
1
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
1
0
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Stopping Method  
Selection  
0182  
0183  
0184  
b1-04  
b1-05  
Disabling Reverse  
Operation  
1
1
0. 1  
0
0
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Operation Selection  
for Minimum  
0 to 3  
Frequency (E1-09 or  
less)  
b1-06  
b1-07  
Setting Control Input  
Responsiveness  
0185  
0186  
1
1
0, 1  
0, 1  
1
0
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Operation Selection  
After Switching to  
Remote Mode  
b2-01  
Excitation level (DC  
injection starting  
frequency)  
0187  
0.1  
0.0 to 10.0  
0 to 100  
0.5  
50  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
b2-02  
b2-03  
DC injection braking  
current  
0188  
0189  
1
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
DC injection braking  
time at start.  
0.01  
0.00 to 10.00 0.00  
Yes  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
Control mode setting  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
b2-04  
b3-01  
b3-02  
DC injection braking  
time at stop.  
018A  
018E  
018F  
0.01  
0.00 to 10.00 0.50  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Speed search  
selection at start  
1
1
0, 1  
0 (See  
note.)  
Speed search  
operation current  
0 to 200  
100  
(See  
note.)  
b3-03  
b4-01  
b4-02  
Speed search  
deceleration time  
0190  
0192  
0193  
0.1  
0.1  
0.1  
0.1 to 10.0  
0.0 to 300.0  
0.0 to 300.0  
0 to 2  
2.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Timer function  
ON-delay time  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Timer function  
OFF-delay time  
b5-01  
b5-02  
b5-03  
b5-04  
b5-05  
b5-06  
b5-07  
PID control selection  
Proportional gain (P)  
Integral time (I)  
Integral limit (I)  
0194  
0195  
0196  
0197  
0198  
0199  
1
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0.01  
0.1  
0.1  
0.01  
0.1  
0.1  
0.00 to 25.00 1.00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0.0 to 360.0  
0.0 to 100.0  
1.0  
100.0  
Differential time (D)  
PID limit  
0.00 to 10.00 0.00  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
0.0  
PID offset adjustment 019A  
100.0 to  
100.0  
b5-08  
b6-01  
PID primary delay  
time constant  
019B  
019C  
0.01  
0.1  
0.00 to 10.00 0.00  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Dwell frequency at  
start  
0.0 to 400.0  
0.0  
b6-02  
b6-03  
Dwell time at start  
019D  
019E  
0.1  
0.1  
0.0 to 10.0  
0.0  
0.0  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Dwell frequency at  
stop  
0.0 to 400.0  
b6-04  
b7-01  
b7-02  
Dwell time at stop  
Droop control gain  
019F  
01A0  
01A1  
0.1  
0.0 to 10.0  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.03 to 2.00  
0.0  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0.1  
0.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Droop control delay  
time  
0.01  
0.05  
b8-01  
b8-02  
Energy-saving gain  
01A2  
01A3  
1
0 to 100  
80  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Energy-saving  
frequency  
0.1  
0.0 to 400.0  
0.0  
b9-01  
b9-02  
Zero-servo gain  
01A4  
01A5  
1
1
0 to 100  
5
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Zero-servo  
completion width  
0 to 16,383  
10  
Note When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop vec-  
tor control default setting will be displayed.)  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D Tuning (C) Parameter Constants  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
0.1  
(See  
note 1.) note 1.)  
0.0 to  
6,000.0 (See  
10.0  
C1-01  
C1-02  
C1-03  
C1-04  
C1-05  
C1-06  
C1-07  
C1-08  
C1-09  
C1-10  
Acceleration time 1  
Deceleration time 1  
Acceleration time 2  
Deceleration time 2  
Acceleration time 3  
Deceleration time 3  
Acceleration time 4  
Deceleration time 4  
0200  
0201  
0202  
0203  
0204  
0205  
0206  
0207  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Emergency stop time 0208  
No  
Acceleration/decelera 0209  
tion time units  
1
0, 1  
1
No  
C1-11  
C2-01  
C2-02  
C2-03  
C2-04  
C3-01  
C3-02  
Acceleration/decelera 020A  
tion switching  
frequency  
0.1  
0.0 to 400.0  
0.0  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
S-curve characteristic 020B  
time at acceleration  
start.  
0.01  
0.01  
0.01  
0.01  
0.1  
0.00 to 2.50  
0.00 to 2.50  
0.00 to 2.50  
0.00 to 2.50  
0.0 to 2.5  
0.20  
0.20  
0.20  
0.00  
S-curve characteristic 020C  
time at acceleration  
end.  
S-curve characteristic 020D  
time at deceleration  
start.  
S-curve characteristic 020E  
time at deceleration  
end.  
Slip compensation  
gain.  
020F  
1.0  
(See  
note 2.)  
Slip compensation  
primary delay time.  
0210  
1
0 to 10,000  
200  
(See  
No  
note 2.)  
C3-03  
C3-04  
C3-05  
C4-01  
C4-02  
C5-01  
Slip compensation  
limit.  
0211  
0212  
0242  
1
0 to 250  
0, 1  
200  
0
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Slip compensation  
during regeneration.  
1
No  
Flux Calculation  
Method  
1
0, 1  
0
No  
Torque compensation 0213  
gain.  
0.01  
1
0.00 to 2.50  
0 to 10,000  
1.00  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Torque compensation 0214  
delay time.  
20 (See No  
note 3.)  
ASR Proportional (P)  
gain 1  
0215  
0216  
0217  
0218  
0219  
0.01  
0.00 to  
300.00  
20.0  
(See  
note 3.)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
C5-02  
C5-03  
C5-04  
C5-05  
ASR Integral (I) time  
1
0.001  
0.01  
0.001  
0.1  
0.000 to  
10.000  
0.500  
(See  
note 3.)  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
ASR Proportional  
Gain (P) 2  
0.00 to  
300.00  
20.0  
(See  
note 3.)  
ASR Integral (I) time  
2
0.000 to  
10.000  
0.500  
(See  
note 3.)  
ASR Limit  
0.0 to 20.0  
5.0  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
Control mode setting  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
C5-06  
C5-07  
ASR Primary delay  
time  
021A  
021B  
0.001  
0.1  
0.000 to  
0.500  
0.004  
0.0  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
ASR Switching  
frequency  
0.0 to 400.0  
C5-08  
C6-01  
ASR Integral (I) Limit  
0241  
021C  
1
0 to 400  
400  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Carrier frequency  
upper limit.  
0.1  
2.0 to 25.0  
(See note 4.) (See  
note 5.)  
15.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
C6-02  
Carrier frequency  
lower limit.  
021D  
0.1  
0.4 to 15.0  
15.0  
(See  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
note 5.)  
C6-03  
C7-01  
C7-02  
Carrier frequency  
proportional gain.  
021E  
021F  
022A  
1
0 to 99  
0, 1  
0 (See  
note 5.)  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Hunting prevention  
selection  
1
1
Hunting prevention  
gain  
0.01  
0.00 to 2.50  
1.00  
C8-08  
C8-09  
AFR Gain  
023A  
022B  
0.01  
1
0.00 to 10.00 1.00  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
AFR primary delay  
time  
0 to 2,000  
50  
C8-30  
Carrier Frequency  
Selection During  
Auto-tuning  
0240  
1
0, 1  
0
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Note 1. The setting range and setting unit for acceleration/deceleration times will differ according to  
the setting for C1-10 (the unit for acceleration/deceleration time).  
Note 2. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop  
vector control default settings will be displayed.)  
Note 3. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The flux vector  
control default settings will be displayed.)  
Note 4. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to the setting range. (The open loop  
vector control setting range will be displayed.)  
Note 5. The default setting of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity. (The value for the  
200-V-class 0.4 kW Inverter will be displayed.)  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D Command-related (d) Parameter Constants  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
0.01  
(See  
note.)  
0.00 to Max.  
frequency  
d1-01  
d1-02  
d1-03  
d1-04  
d1-05  
d1-06  
d1-07  
d1-08  
d1-09  
d2-01  
d2-02  
Frequency reference  
1
0280  
0281  
0282  
0283  
0284  
0285  
0286  
0287  
0288  
0289  
028A  
6.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
6.00  
100.0  
0.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Frequency reference  
2
Frequency reference  
3
Frequency reference  
4
Frequency reference  
5
Frequency reference  
6
Frequency reference  
7
Frequency reference  
8
Jog frequency  
reference  
Reference frequency  
upper limit  
0.1  
0.1  
0.1  
0.0 to 110.0  
0.0 to 109.0  
0.0 to 400.0  
Reference frequency  
lower limit  
No  
0.0  
d3-01  
d3-02  
d3-03  
d3-04  
d4-01  
Jump frequency 1  
Jump frequency 2  
Jump frequency 3  
028B  
028C  
028D  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Jump frequency width 028E  
0.1  
1
0.0 to 20.0  
0,1  
1.0  
0
Reference frequency  
hold function  
028F  
selection  
d4-02  
d5-01  
Trim control level  
0290  
0291  
1
1
0 to 100  
0, 1  
25  
0
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Torque control  
selection  
d5-02  
Torque reference  
delay time  
0292  
1
0 to 1,000  
0
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
d5-03  
d5-04  
d5-05  
d5-06  
Speed limit selection  
Speed limit  
0293  
0294  
0295  
0296  
1
1
1
1
1, 2  
1
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
120 to +120  
0 to 120  
0 to 1,000  
0
Speed limit bias  
10  
0
Speed/torque control  
switching timer.  
Note The setting unit and setting range of the frequency reference can be changed using o1-03 (fre-  
quency reference setting and display units). Refer to the default setting of o1-03.  
D Motor Constant (E) Parameter Constants  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
E1-01  
E1-02  
Input voltage setting  
Motor selection  
0300  
0301  
1
1
155 to 255  
(See note 1.) (See  
note 1.)  
200  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0, 1  
0
Yes  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
Control mode setting  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
E1-03  
E1-04  
V/f pattern selection  
0302  
0303  
Hex  
0 to F  
F
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Maximum frequency  
(FMAX)  
0.1  
40.0 to 400.0 60.0  
Yes  
Yes  
E1-05  
Maximum voltage  
(VMAX)  
0304  
0.1  
0.0 to 255.0  
(See note 1.) (See  
note 1.)  
200.0  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
E1-06  
E1-07  
Maximum voltage  
frequency (FA)  
0305  
0306  
0.1  
0.1  
0.0 to 400.0  
60.0  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Intermediate  
frequency (FB)  
0.0 to 400.0  
3.0  
(See  
note 2.)  
E1-08  
Intermediate voltage  
(VC)  
0307  
0.1  
0.0 to 255.0  
(See note 1.) (see  
note 1,  
11.0  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
2)  
E1-09  
E1-10  
Minimum frequency  
(FMIN)  
0308  
0309  
0.1  
0.1  
0.0 to 400.0  
0.5  
(See  
note 2.)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Minimum voltage  
(VMIN)  
0.0 to 255.0  
(See note 1.) note 1,  
2)  
2.0 (see No  
E1-11  
E1-12  
E1-13  
E2-01  
Mid. Output  
Frequency B  
030A  
030B  
030C  
030E  
0.1  
0.1  
0.1  
0.0 to 400.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
1.90  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Mid. Output  
Frequency Voltage B  
0.0 to 255.0  
(See note 1.)  
Base Voltage  
0.0 to 255.0  
(See note 1.)  
Motor rated current  
0.01  
(See  
note 5.)  
0.32 to 6.40  
(See note 4.) (See  
note 3.)  
E2-02  
E2-03  
Motor rated slip  
030F  
0.01  
0.00 to 20.00 2.90  
(See  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
note 3.)  
Motor no-load current 0310  
0.01  
(See  
note 5.)  
0.00 to 6.39  
1.20  
(See note 4.) (See  
note 3.)  
E2-04  
E2-05  
Number of motor  
poles  
0311  
1
2 to 48  
4
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Motor phase-to-phase 0312  
resistance  
0.001  
0.000 to  
65.000  
9.842  
(See  
Yes  
Yes  
note 3.)  
E2-06  
E2-07  
E2-08  
Motor leakage  
inductance  
0313  
0314  
0315  
0316  
0.1  
0.0 to 30.0  
0.00 to 0.50  
0.00 to 0.75  
18.2  
(See  
note 3.)  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Motor iron-core  
saturation coefficient  
1
0.01  
0.01  
0.50  
0.75  
Motor iron-core  
saturation coefficient  
2
E2-09  
E3-01  
Mechanical loss  
0.1  
1
0.0 to 10.0  
0, 2  
0.0  
2
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Select control method 0317  
of motor 2  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
E4-01  
E4-02  
Motor 2 maximum  
frequency  
0318  
0.1  
0.1  
40.0 to 400.0 60.0  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Motor 2 maximum  
voltage  
0319  
0.0 to 255.0  
(See note 1.) (See  
note 1.)  
200.0  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
Control mode setting  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
E4-03  
E4-04  
Motor 2 maximum  
voltage frequency  
031A  
031B  
0.1  
0.0 to 400.0  
0.0 to 400.0  
60.0  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Motor 2 intermediate  
frequency  
0.1  
0.1  
3.0  
(See  
note 2.)  
E4-05  
Motor 2 intermediate  
voltage  
031C  
0.0 to 255.0  
(See note 1.) (see  
note 1,  
11.0  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
2)  
E4-06  
E4-07  
E5-01  
E5-02  
E5-03  
Motor 2 minimum  
frequency  
031D  
031E  
031F  
0320  
0321  
0.1  
0.1  
0.0 to 400.0  
0.5  
(See  
note 2.)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Motor 2 minimum  
voltage  
0.0 to 255.0  
(See note 1.) note 1,  
2)  
2.0 (see No  
Motor 2 rated current  
Motor 2 rated slip  
0.01  
(See  
note 5.)  
0.32 to 6.40  
(See note 4.) (See  
note 3.)  
1.90  
No  
No  
No  
0.01  
0.00 to 20.00 2.90  
(See  
note 3.)  
1.20  
(See note 4.) (See  
note 3.)  
Motor 2 no-load  
current  
0.01  
(See  
note 5.)  
0.00 to 6.39  
E5-04  
E5-05  
Motor 2 number of  
motor poles  
0322  
0323  
1
2 to 48  
4
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Motor 2  
phase-to-phase  
resistance  
0.001  
0.000 to  
65.000  
9.842  
(See  
note 3.)  
Yes  
Yes  
E5-06  
Motor 2 leakage  
inductance  
0324  
0.1  
0.0 to 30.0  
18.2  
(See  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
note 3.)  
Note 1. These are values for a 200-V-class Inverter. Values for the 400-V-class Inverter are double  
those given.  
Note 2. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop  
vector control default settings will be displayed.)  
Note 3. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4 kW  
Inverter will be displayed.  
Note 4. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverters rated output current. The values for a  
200-V-class 0.4 kW Inverter will be displayed.  
Note 5. Units of 0.01 A are used for a capacity of 7.5 kW or below and units of 0.1 A are used for a  
capacity of 11 kW or over.  
Note 6. Motor 2 parameters depend on the E301 (motor 2 control mode selection) settings.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
D Option (F) Parameter Constants  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
ter No. unit  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
F1-01  
F1-02  
Number of PG pulses 0380  
1
1
0 to 60,000  
0 to 3  
1,000  
1
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
PG disconnection  
stopping method  
(PGO)  
0381  
F1-03  
F1-04  
PG overspeed  
stopping method  
0382  
0383  
1
1
0 to 3  
0 to 3  
1
3
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
PG speed deviation  
stopping method  
F1-05  
F1-06  
F1-07  
PG rotation setting  
PG output ratio  
0384  
0385  
0386  
1
1
1
0, 1  
0
1
0
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
1 to 132  
0,1  
Selecting integral  
control during  
accel/decel.  
F1-08  
F1-09  
Overspeed (OS)  
detection level.  
0387  
0388  
1
0 to 120  
115  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Overspeed (OS)  
detection time  
0.1  
0.0 to 2.0  
0.0  
(See  
note.)  
F1-10  
F1-11  
PG speed deviation  
detection level (DEV)  
0389  
038A  
1
0 to 50  
10  
0.5  
0
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
PG speed deviation  
detection time (DEV)  
0.1  
1
0.0 to 10.0  
0 to 1,000  
F1-12  
F1-13  
F1-14  
Number of PG gear  
teeth 1  
038B  
038C  
0397  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Number of PG gear  
teeth 2  
PG Disconnection  
Detection Time  
0.1  
1
0.0 to 10.0  
0, 1  
2.0  
0
F2-01  
F3-01  
F4-01  
Analog Reference  
Card selection  
038D  
038E  
038F  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Digital Reference  
Card input selection  
1
0 to 7  
0
Channel 1 output  
monitor selection  
1
1 to 31  
2
F4-02  
F4-03  
Channel 1 gain  
0390  
0391  
0.01  
1
0.00 to 2.50  
1 to 31  
1.00  
3
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Channel 2 output  
monitor selection  
F4-04  
F5-01  
F5-02  
F601  
F7-01  
Channel 2 gain  
Not used.  
0392  
0393  
0394  
0395  
0.01  
0.00 to 2.50  
0.50  
Yes  
---  
Yes  
---  
Yes  
---  
Yes  
---  
Yes  
---  
1
1
1
1
---  
0
1
0
1
Not used.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Not used.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Output pulse multiple 0396  
selection  
0 to 4  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
F8-01  
F9-01  
F9-02  
Operation detection  
communications error  
(SYSMAC BUS)  
0398  
0399  
039A  
1
1
1
0 to 3  
0, 1  
1
0
0
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Communications  
external fault input  
selection  
Communications  
external fault input  
detection selection  
0, 1  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
Control mode setting  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
F9-03  
Communications  
external fault input  
operation selection  
039B  
1
0 to 3  
1
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
F9-04  
F9-05  
F9-06  
Not used.  
Not used.  
039C  
039E  
039F  
1
1
1
---  
0
1
1
---  
---  
No  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
CompoBus/D  
operation selection  
0 to 3  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Note When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The flux vector  
control default settings will be displayed.)  
D External Terminal Function (H) Parameter Constants  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
ter No. unit  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
Hex  
0 to 77  
H1-01  
H1-02  
H1-03  
Multi-function input 1: 0400  
Terminal 3 selection  
24  
14  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Multi-function input 2: 0401  
Terminal 4 selection  
Multi-function input 3: 0402  
Terminal 5 selection  
3 (0)  
(See  
note.)  
H1-04  
H1-05  
H1-06  
H2-01  
Multi-function input 4: 0403  
Terminal 6 selection  
4 (3)  
(See  
note.)  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Multi-function input 5: 0404  
Terminal 7 selection  
6 (4)  
(See  
note.)  
Multi-function input 6: 0405  
Terminal 8 selection  
8 (6)  
(See  
note.)  
Hex  
0 to 37  
Multi-function contact 0406  
output: terminal 9 to  
10.  
0
H2-02  
H2-03  
H3-01  
H3-02  
H3-03  
H3-04  
Multi-function output  
1: terminal 25.  
0407  
0408  
0409  
040A  
040B  
040C  
1
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Multi-function output  
2: terminal 26.  
2
Signal selection:  
terminal 13 (Voltage)  
1
0, 1  
0
Gain: terminal 13  
Bias: terminal 13  
0.1  
0.1  
1
0.0 to  
1,000.0  
100.0  
0.0  
0
100.0 to  
+100.0  
Multi-function analog  
input signal selection:  
terminal 16  
0, 1  
H3-05  
H3-06  
Selection: Terminal 16 040D  
Hex  
0.1  
0 to 1F  
1F  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Gain: terminal 16  
040E  
040F  
0410  
0.0 to  
1,000.0  
100.0  
Yes  
H3-07  
H3-08  
H3-09  
Bias: terminal 16  
0.1  
1
100.0 to  
+100.0  
0.0  
2
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Signal selection:  
terminal 14  
0 to 2  
Selection: Terminal 14 0411  
Hex  
1 to 1F  
1F  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
Control mode setting  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
H3-10  
H3-11  
H3-12  
H4-01  
Gain: Terminal 14  
Bias: Terminal 14  
0412  
0413  
0.1  
0.0 to  
1,000.0  
100.0  
0.0  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
0.1  
0.01  
1
100.0 to  
+100.0  
Analog input filter time 0414  
constant  
0.00 to 2.00  
1 to 31  
0.00  
2
Multi-function analog  
output 1 selection:  
terminal 21  
0415  
No  
H4-02  
H4-03  
Gain terminal 21  
Bias terminal 21  
0416  
0417  
0.01  
0.1  
0.00 to 2.50  
1.00  
0.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
10.0 to  
+10.0  
H4-04  
Multi-function analog  
output 2 selection:  
terminal 23  
0418  
1
1 to 31  
3
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
H4-05  
H4-06  
Gain terminal 23  
Bias terminal 23  
0419  
041A  
0.01  
0.1  
0.00 to 2.50  
0.50  
0.0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
10.0 to  
+10.0  
H4-07  
Analog output signal  
level selection  
041B  
1
0, 1  
0
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
H5-01  
H5-02  
H5-03  
H5-04  
H5-05  
Not used.  
Not used.  
Not used.  
Not used.  
Not used.  
041C  
041D  
041E  
041F  
0420  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
1F  
3
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0
3
1
Note The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.  
D Protective Function (L) Parameter Constants  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
L1-01  
L1-02  
L2-01  
L2-02  
Motor protection  
selection  
0480  
1
0, 1  
1
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Motor protection time 0481  
constant  
0.1  
1
0.1 to 5.0  
0 to 2  
1.0  
0
Momentary power  
loss selection  
0482  
Momentary power  
loss ridethru  
0483  
0.1  
0.0 to 2.0  
0.7  
(See  
note 1.)  
L2-03  
L2-04  
L2-05  
Minimum baseblock  
time (BB)  
0484  
0485  
0486  
0.1  
0.1  
1
0.0 to 5.0  
0.0 to 5.0  
150 to 210  
0.5  
(See  
note 1.)  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Voltage restart time  
0.3  
(See  
note 1.)  
Under voltage  
detection level (UV)  
190  
(See note 2.) (See  
note 2.)  
L2-06  
L3-01  
Not used  
0487  
0488  
0.1  
1
---  
0.0  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Stall prevention  
during acceleration  
0 to 2  
1
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
Control mode setting  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
L3-02  
L3-03  
L3-04  
L3-05  
L3-06  
L4-01  
L4-02  
L4-03  
L4-04  
L4-05  
Stall prevention level  
during acceleration  
0489  
048A  
048B  
048C  
048D  
0490  
0491  
0492  
0493  
0494  
1
1
1
1
1
0 to 200  
150  
50  
1
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Stall prevention limit  
during acceleration  
0 to 100  
0 to 2  
No  
Stall prevention  
during deceleration  
Yes  
No  
Stall prevention  
during run  
0 to 2  
1
Stall prevention level  
during run  
30 to 200  
0.0 to 400.0  
0.0 to 20.0  
160  
0.0  
2.0  
0.0  
2.0  
0
No  
No  
Frequency detection  
level  
0.1  
0.1  
0.1  
0.1  
1
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Frequency detection  
width  
Frequency detection  
level (+/)  
400,0 to  
+400.0  
Frequency detection  
width (+/)  
0.0 to 20.0  
0, 1  
Operation when  
frequency reference  
is lost  
L5-01  
L5-02  
L6-01  
L6-02  
L6-03  
L6-04  
L6-05  
L6-06  
Number of auto  
restart attempts  
0495  
1
0 to 10  
0, 1  
0
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Auto restart operation 0496  
selection  
1
0
Torque detection  
selection 1  
0498  
1
0 to 4  
0
Torque detection  
level1  
0499  
1
0 to 300  
0.0 to 10.0  
0 to 4  
150  
0.1  
0
Torque detection time 049A  
1
0.1  
1
Torque detection  
selection 2  
049B  
Torque detection level 049C  
2
1
0 to 300  
0.0 to 10.0  
0 to 300  
150  
0.1  
200  
Torque detection time 049D  
2
0.1  
1
L7-01  
L7-02  
L7-03  
Forward torque limit  
Reverse torque limit  
049E  
049F  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Forward regenerative 04A0  
torque limit  
L7-04  
Reverse regenerative 04A1  
torque limit  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
L8-01  
L8-02  
DB resistor protection 04A4  
1
1
0, 1  
0
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Inverter overheat  
detection pre-alarm  
level  
04A5  
04A6  
50 to 110  
95  
L8-03  
Operation after  
Inverter overheat  
pre-alarm  
1
0 to 3  
3
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
L8-05  
L8-07  
Input open-phase  
protection selection  
04A8  
04AA  
1
1
0, 1  
0, 1  
0
0
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Output open-phase  
protection selection  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CompoBus/D Communications Card Operations  
Chapter 5  
Note 1. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4 kW  
Inverter will be displayed.  
Note 2. These are values for a 200-V-class Inverter. Values for 400-V-class Inverter are double.  
D Operator (o) Parameter Constants  
Control mode setting  
Constant  
Name  
Regis- Setting  
Setting  
range  
Default Chang  
setting es dur-  
ing op-  
ter No.  
unit  
V/f  
control  
V/f with  
PG  
Open  
loop  
vector  
Flux  
vector  
eration  
o1-01  
o1-02  
Monitor selection  
0500  
1
1
4 to 28  
6
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Monitor selection after 0501  
power-on  
1 to 4  
1
o1-03  
o1-04  
Frequency reference  
setting and display  
units  
0502  
1
1
0 to 39,999  
0
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
V/f pattern setting  
units  
0503  
0, 1  
0
o1-05  
o2-01  
o2-02  
o2-03  
Not used  
0504  
0505  
0506  
0507  
1
1
1
1
---  
0
1
1
0
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Local/Remote Key  
Stop Key  
0, 1  
0, 1  
0 to 2  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
User constant initial  
values  
o2-04  
o2-05  
o2-06  
Inverter capacity  
selection  
0508  
0509  
050A  
Hex  
1
0 to FF (See 0 (See  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
note.)  
note.)  
Frequency reference  
setting method  
0, 1  
0
Operation selection  
when Digital Operator  
is disconnected  
1
0, 1  
0
o2-07  
o2-08  
o2-09  
Cumulative operation 050B  
time setting  
1
1
1
0 to 65,635  
0
0
0
No  
No  
---  
Yes  
Yes  
---  
Yes  
Yes  
---  
Yes  
Yes  
---  
Yes  
Yes  
---  
Cumulative operation 050C  
time selection  
0, 1  
---  
Factory use  
050D  
Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4 kW Inverter  
will be displayed.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Chapter 6  
Communications Errors  
6-1 Communications Line Errors  
6-2 Message Communications Errors  
6-3 Special Remote I/O Errors  
6-4 Inverter Faults  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Errors  
Chapter 6  
6-1 Communications Line Errors  
Malfunctions in CompoBus/D communications that are a result of broken wires, short circuits, reversed  
wiring, duplicate node address assignments, or noise interference are detected as transmission (BUS)  
errors. When a transmission error is detected, the Inverters Fault Bit will turn ON and the motor will  
coast to a stop. (For Inverters with a software version of 1042 or later, the operation when a communica-  
tions error occurs can be set using constant F9-06.)  
When an error is detected, perform error processing according to the indicator display of the Compo-  
Bus/D Communications Card.  
H Operation Indicators  
The CompoBus/D Communications Card has 4 operation indicators that show the status of the power  
and communications.  
Display  
Color Status  
Green Lit  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Countermeasures  
PWR  
Power is being supplied from the Inverter  
to the Card.  
---  
---  
Not lit  
Power is not being supplied from the In-  
verter.  
Check the Option Card con-  
nector and turn ON the Invert-  
er power supply.  
The Card is not connected properly and  
power is not being supplied to it.  
Replace the Option Card.  
---  
MS  
Green  
Lit  
The Card is operating normally.  
Flashing  
Initial settings or necessary preparations  
for communications are incomplete.  
Turn ON the Inverter power  
supply again.  
Replace the Option Card.  
Red  
Lit  
A fatal error (hardware error) has occurred Turn ON the Inverter power  
in the Card.  
supply again.  
Replace the Option Card.  
Flashing  
A non-fatal error, such as a switch setting  
error, has occurred.  
Check the baud rate setting.  
Turn ON the Inverter power  
supply again.  
Replace the Option Card.  
---  
Not lit  
Power is not being supplied from the In-  
verter.  
Check the Option Card con-  
nector and turn ON the Invert-  
er power supply.  
The Card is not connected properly and  
power is not being to supplied to it.  
Replace the Option Card.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Errors  
Chapter 6  
Indicator  
Display  
Color Status  
Green  
Meaning  
Countermeasures  
NS  
Lit  
The CompoBus/D Network (DeviceNet) is ---  
operating normally.  
(Communications connections estab-  
lished.)  
Flashing  
The Network is normal, but the commu-  
nications connection with the Master Unit  
is not established.  
Turn ON the power supply  
again after the following steps.  
Register in the scan list.  
Turn ON the power supply to  
the Master Unit.  
Red  
Lit  
A fatal communications error has oc-  
curred.  
Turn ON the power supply  
again after the following steps.  
A CompoBus/D communications error was Correct node address du-  
detected caused by node address duplica-  
tion or Bus OFF. (These errors make com-  
munications impossible.)  
plication.  
Connect termination resis-  
tance to both ends of the com-  
munications line.  
Correct the Master Unit errors  
that occur when the Master  
Unit stops after communica-  
tions is once established.  
Correct environmental condi-  
tions such as noise.  
Flashing  
A non-fatal communications error has oc-  
curred due to communications timeout.  
Turn ON the power supply  
again after the following pro-  
cessing.  
Connect termination resis-  
tance to both ends of the com-  
munications line.  
Correct defective connec-  
tions in the communications  
line.  
Correct environmental condi-  
tions such as noise.  
---  
Not lit  
A CompoBus/D Network error has oc-  
curred. For example, the Network does not  
exist, power is not supplied to the Card, or  
the baud rates do not match.  
Check the baud rate setting.  
Check the Option Card con-  
nector and turn ON the Invert-  
er power supply.  
Replace the Option Card.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Errors  
Chapter 6  
Indicator  
Display  
Color Status  
Green Flashing  
Meaning  
Countermeasures  
WD  
The CPU Unit of the Card is operating nor- ---  
mally.  
Red  
Lit  
The CPU Unit of the Card is not ready or  
the CPU Unit has malfunctioned.  
Check the Option Card con-  
nector and turn ON the Invert-  
er power supply.  
Replace the Option Card.  
---  
Not lit  
Power is not being supplied from the In-  
verter.  
Check the Option Card con-  
nector and turn ON the Invert-  
er power supply.  
The Card is not connected properly and  
power is not being to supplied to it.  
Replace the Option Card.  
Note 1. When both of the baud rate setting pins DR0 and DR1 are set to ON, both the MS and NS will  
be lit in red.  
Note 2. For communications line problems, detailed error codes will be displayed on the indicators of  
the Master Unit. Check the error code and take appropriate countermeasures according to  
the descriptions in Chapter 15 Troubleshooting and Maintenance of CompoBus/D (Device-  
Net) Operation Manual (W267).  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Errors  
Chapter 6  
6-2 Message Communications Errors  
H Explicit Message Errors  
If an explicit message is sent, but communications do not end normally, one of the following error codes  
will be returned with service code 94. Check the meaning of the error message, and either correct the  
message or adjust the timing of the message.  
Error  
Code  
Meaning  
Countermeasures  
0000  
Normal end response.  
---  
08FF  
09FF  
0CFF  
0EFF  
The requested service does not exist.  
An invalid attribute was detected.  
Correct the service code and send the data  
again.  
Check and correct the attribute values, and  
send the data again.  
The requested service cannot be executed in  
the current object mode or status.  
Stop the Inverter and send the data again.  
A request has been sent to change an attribute Check and correct the service code and  
that cannot be changed. attribute values, and send the data again.  
There is insufficient data to execute the service. Correct the data size and send the data again.  
13FF  
14FF  
The attribute for the service does not exist.  
Check and correct the service code and  
attribute values, and send the data again.  
15FF  
16FF  
These is too much data to execute the service. Correct the data size and send the data again.  
The specified object does not exist.  
Check and correct the class and instance  
values, and send the data again.  
20FF  
1FFF  
The parameters are invalid or the data is  
outside the range for the requested service.  
Check and correct the data setting range, send  
the data again.  
Manufacturer fault code.  
Stop the Inverter and send the data again.  
Check and correct the data setting range, send  
the data again.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Errors  
Chapter 6  
6-3 Special Remote I/O Errors  
H Special Remote I/O Errors  
If each function is not set properly using the special remote I/O, the MSB of the function code will be  
changed to 1 and one of the following error codes will be returned. Check the meaning of the error mes-  
sage, and either correct the message or adjust the timing of the message.  
Error Code  
Meaning  
---  
Normal operation response.  
When sending data, the code will be returned with the function code and register number  
followed by the amount of data being written or read data.  
01  
02  
21  
Function code error: A function code that is not supported has been received.  
Invalid register number: A register number that is not registered has been received.  
Data setting error: The data is outside the specified range or does not comply with the  
constant restrictions.  
22  
24  
Write mode error: Attempted write during operation, during UV, or while there was a CPU  
Unit error, or attempted write to a read-only register.  
Attempted write during constant processing (busy status).  
Note The MSB of the function code will be returned as 1 when there is a communications failure.  
H Enter Command  
When entering data in the parameter constant (register No. 0100 or higher), be sure to send an enter  
command. If the enter command is not transmitted after writing data, the following situation will occur.  
Written data will not be enabled.  
Written data will be enabled only after an enter command is sent.  
Inverter will not start.  
The Inverter will determine the state as being under programming until it receives an enter command  
and will ignore the start or run command.  
After sending an enter command, input the start or run command again.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Errors  
Chapter 6  
6-4 Inverter Faults  
H Detecting Inverter Faults  
When a fault is detected in the Inverter itself, the status will change as shown in the following table.  
Function  
Remote I/O  
Inverter Fault Status  
The fault output allocated in the remote I/O will turn ON.  
If the fault output is ON, turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter,  
and program a sequence to stop the program.  
Explicit messages  
Special remote I/O  
Read the fault output for Class 29, Instance 1, Attribute 0A using message  
communications. If there is a fault in the Inverter, the fault output will be ON,  
so turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter, and program a  
sequence to stop the program.  
Read register 0010, and check whether bit 07 (fault output) is ON (serious  
fault). If bit 07 is ON, turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter, and  
program a sequence to stop the program.  
H Confirming Inverter Fault Status  
The fault information for the Inverter can be checked by using the following methods. Perform trouble-  
shooting based on the information corresponding to the fault and refer to maintenance information in  
the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV High-function General-purpose Inverter User’s Manual (I516).  
Function  
Inverter Error Status  
Operation indicators on  
Inverter  
When there is an Inverter fault, the details will be displayed on the Digital  
Operator of the Inverter. The fault log can be checked using the monitor  
function (U3).  
Explicit messages  
Special remote I/O  
Read the fault code for Class 29, Instance 1, Attribute 0D using message  
communications. The code corresponding to the Inverter fault is specified.  
Read registers 0014 to 0018. Check the fault status from the bit signals that  
are output for an Inverter fault. The fault log can be checked using the  
monitor function (U3) in registers 0090 to 0093.  
H Memory Data Backup  
The SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter uses EEPROM for the data backup. Data is written to EEPROM when  
the parameters change or the power is turned OFF.  
Data can be written to EEPROM up to 100,000 times.  
Parameters are always written to EEPROM when they are changed using CompoBus/D communica-  
tions, so limit the times that parameters are written to EEPROM as much as possible.  
(With the special I/O, data will be written to EEPROM when an enter command is received.)  
Frequency reference and control command (register numbers 0000 to 000F for the special I/O) and  
the Net Control Bit and Net Reference Bit are not written to RAM or EEPROM. When the power is  
turned OFF, any specified values are cleared.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Chapter 7  
Communications  
Programs  
(SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
7-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming  
7-2 Message Communications Programming  
7-3 Special Remote I/O Programs  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
Note In this chapter, the bits, words, and data memory used in the ladder pro-  
grams are selected at random. When creating actual programs, modify the  
contents so that they do not overlap with other areas.  
7-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming  
When the following standard remote I/O programming is executed, the rotational speed reference data  
specified in the DM (Data Memory) Area of the PC is written to the 3G3FV Inverter and forward or re-  
verse operation is performed at the specified frequency when the Frequency Reference Input Bit is  
turned ON and the Forward Input Bit or Reverse Input Bit is turned ON.  
H Allocations  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Frequency Reference Input Bit  
Forward Input Bit  
00000  
00001  
00002  
00003  
00004  
03000  
Reverse Input Bit  
Fault Reset Input Bit  
Local/Network selection Bit  
Fault Flag  
DM0000  
Rotational speed reference data  
D Remote I/O: Outputs from PC to 3G3FV Inverter  
Words n and n + 1  
Byte  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Net  
Reference Control  
--- ---  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
n
Rightmost  
0
---  
---  
Net  
---  
---  
---  
Fault  
Reset  
---  
Reverse/  
Stop  
Forward/  
Stop  
Leftmost  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
1
2
3
---  
---  
---  
n+1  
Rotational speed reference data  
Rotational speed reference data  
D Remote I/O: Inputs from 3G3FV Inverter to PC  
Words m and m + 1  
Byte  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
During  
Reverse  
Run  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
m
Rightmost  
0
At  
Frequency From Net  
Reference Control  
Inverter  
Ready  
During  
Forward  
Run  
Warning  
Fault  
From Net  
Leftmost  
Rightmost  
Leftmost  
1
2
3
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
m+1  
Rotational speed reference data  
Rotational speed reference data  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Timing Chart  
00000  
(Frequency Reference Input Bit)  
00001  
(Forward Input Bit)  
00002  
(Reverse Input Bit)  
Word m bit 2  
(During Forward Run)  
Word m bit 3  
(During Reverse Run)  
Rotational speed reference data  
DM 0000 (rotational speed reference data transmitted to words n + 1)  
03000 (Fault Flag)  
00003 (Fault Reset Input Bit)  
3.  
1.  
4.  
2.  
6.  
5.  
7.  
H Operation  
1. When the Frequency Reference Input Bit turns ON, the rotational speed reference data specified in  
DM 0000 is moved to remote I/O output word n + 1.  
2. When the Forward Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 0 (Forward/Stop) will turn ON, and for-  
ward operation will start. During forward operation, remote I/O word m bit 2 (During Forward Run)  
will be ON.  
3. When the Forward Input Bit turns OFF, remote I/O word m bit 2 (During Forward Run) will turn OFF  
after operation will decelerate to a stop.  
4. When the Reverse Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 1 (Reverse/Stop) will turn ON, and re-  
verse operation will start. During reverse operation, remote I/O word m bit 3 (During Reverse Run)  
will be ON.  
5. When the Reverse Input Bit turns OFF, remote I/O word m bit 3 (During Reverse Run) will turn OFF  
after operation decelerates to a stop.  
6. When the remote I/O Fault Bit (word m bit 0) turns ON, the Fault Flag will turn ON.  
7. When the Fault Reset Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 2 (Fault Reset Input Bit) will turn ON,  
and the fault will be cleared. When the fault is reset, the Fault Flag will turn OFF simultaneously.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Ladder Program  
00004  
DIFU (013)  
03001  
DIFD (014)  
03002  
During forward run  
(word m bit 2)  
During reverse run  
(word m bit 3)  
03001  
03003  
03003  
03004  
03002  
See note  
03004  
03004  
Net control  
(word n bit 5)  
Net reference  
(word n bit 6)  
00000  
MOV (021)  
Speed reference setting  
DM0000  
n+1  
Reverse Operation  
(word m bit 3)  
00001  
00002  
03000  
03000  
Forward/Stop Bit  
(word n bit 0)  
Forward Operation  
(word m bit 2)  
Reverse/Stop Bit  
(word n bit 1)  
Fault Bit  
(word m bit 0)  
00003  
Fault Flag  
(03000)  
03000  
00003  
Fault Reset Input Bit  
(word n bit 2)  
Note This program is not required if the b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) and b1-02 (Inverter  
Run Command Selection) are set to 3.”  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
7-2 Message Communications Programming  
7-2-1 Inverter Fault Processing  
The message communications programming example given here reads and stores the fault data using  
explicit messages for fault outputs from the Inverter. If the Inverter has a fault, the remote I/O inputs  
Fault Bit (word m bit 0) will turn ON. Be sure to turn OFF the Run Command Bits (word n bits 0 and 1). In  
this program example, the fault code is stored in DM 0200.  
If commands are interrupted by faults, store the completion code in the DM Area and re-execute the  
command. When a fault occurs, check the contents of the fault and take countermeasures referring to  
information provided in the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV High-function General-purpose Inverter Users Manual  
(I516).  
H Allocations  
Fault Flag  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
03000  
00000  
00001  
00002  
03003  
03002  
00100  
Fault Code Read Flag  
IOWR Write Completed Flag  
Response Flag  
Sending Message Flag  
Message Sent Flag  
Reset Input Bit  
Slave node address (3G3FV Inverter)  
DM0000  
Response data storage area  
DM 2000  
DM 2001  
DM 2002  
DM 2003  
DM 2004  
Command code 2801  
Completion code  
Received bytes  
Node address, service code; 8E: Read normal, 94: Error  
Read data or error code  
Completion code storage for communications errors  
DM 0100  
DM 0200  
Fault code storage for Inverter fault  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Timing Chart  
Word m bit 0  
(Fault Bit)  
00000  
(Fault Read Flag)  
03003  
(Sending Message Flag)  
03002  
(Message Sent Flag)  
IOWR instruction execution  
00001  
(IOWR Write Completed Flag)  
00002  
(Response Flag)  
10112 (Message Communications  
Enabled Flag)  
03000 (Fault Flag)  
00100 (Reset Input Bit)  
DM0200 (Fault code storage)  
Fault code  
1.  
2.  
3.  
H Operation  
1. When the Inverter has a fault, bit 0 of word m (Fault Bit) will be turned ON. Until the fault is cleared,  
the Fault Flag will be turn ON, and this will cause the Fault Read Flag to be turned ON, and the com-  
mand specified in the DM Area will be sent using the IOWR instruction.  
2. When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON, the completion code (DM 2001)  
will be examined. If an error is found, the error code will be stored in DM 0100 and re-send message.  
If normally completed, the fault code will be stored in DM 0200 and the Message Sent Flag will be  
turned ON, and the Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF.  
3. When the Reset Input Bit is turned ON, bit 2 of word n (Fault Reset Input Bit) will turn ON. When the  
fault is cleared, the Fault Flag will turn OFF.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Ladder Program  
Master Unit: Node 0  
Fault Bit  
(word m bit 0)  
03001  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
DIFU (013)  
#00FE  
03001  
DM0500  
03000 (Fault Flag)  
Fault Bit  
(word m bit 0)  
03001  
03000  
#8207  
word n bit 2 (Fault Reset Bit)  
DM1000  
00100 (Reset Input Bit)  
03001  
#D000  
MOV (021)  
#0000  
DM1001  
DM0300  
#0064  
MOVD (083)  
DM0000  
#0210  
DM1002  
#0009  
DM0300  
DM1003  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
ORW (035)  
DM0300  
#000E  
#2801  
Sets the node address  
for Slaves to be read.  
DM1004  
DM0400  
03001  
DM0400  
DM1005  
BEST (071)  
#0000  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
DM2000  
DM2009  
#0029  
DM1006  
MOV (021)  
#0001  
#0001  
000  
DM1007  
Clears the storage area  
and sets word 000 used  
for shift register to 1.”  
MOV (021)  
#0D00  
DM1008  
Creates IOWR instruction data.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
10112  
00002  
Message Communications Enabled Flag  
CMP (020)  
MOV (021)  
Checks the message response.  
#0000  
DM2001  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
Re-executes the IOWR instruction  
in case of FINS error stop.  
DM2001  
DM0100  
ASR (026)  
ASR (026)  
000  
000  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
MOV (021)  
Transfers data to DM 0200 in  
case of FINS normal stop.  
DM2004  
DM0200  
03002  
03002  
00000  
03003  
Sending Message Flag  
03003  
00000  
10112  
Message Communications Enabled Flag  
ASL (025)  
000  
When the Master  
Unit No. is 0.  
IOWR (223)  
DM0500  
DM1000  
#0009  
Executes IOWR instruction.  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
00001  
ASR (026)  
000  
Checks execution of IOWR  
instruction.  
ASL (025)  
000  
7-2-2 Reading/Writing Data  
This programming example writes and reads data using explicit messages. Explicit messages can be  
executed by specifying FINS commands in the DM Area allocated to the PC, and sending them using  
the CMND or IOWR instructions.  
If there is an error in the command, the completion code is stored in the DM Area and the command is  
re-executed.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Allocations  
Program Start Input Bit  
Message Execution Flag  
Command Write Flag  
Response Flag  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
01000  
00000  
00001  
00002  
03000  
03001  
Sending Message Flag  
Message Sent Flag  
Slave node address (3G3FV Inverter)  
Service code; 0E: Read, 10: Write  
Number of command data bytes (hex)  
Class ID (hex)  
DM 0000  
DM 0001  
DM 0002  
DM 0003  
DM 0004  
DM 0005  
DM 0006  
Instance ID (hex)  
Attribute ID (hex)  
to  
DM 0009  
Write data (hex) (See note)  
Response data storage area  
DM 2000  
DM 2001  
DM 2002  
DM 2003  
DM 2004  
Command code  
Completion code  
Number of bytes received  
Node address, service code; 8E Read normal, 90: Write normal, 94: Error  
to  
Read data or error code  
DM 0009  
DM 0100  
Completion code storage area for communications errors  
Note If the written data size is Word,set in the order of the rightmost bits and leftmost bits.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Timing Chart  
01000  
(Program Start Input Bit)  
01001  
(Start Switch ON)  
00000  
(Message Execution Flag)  
03000  
(Sending Message Flag)  
03001  
(Message Sent Flag)  
IOWR instruction execution  
00001 IOWR Write  
Completed Flag  
00002 Response Flag  
Message Communications  
Enabled Flag  
Completion code error  
DM 0100  
(Completion code storage)  
1.  
2.  
3.  
H Operation  
1. When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, the Message Execution Flag will turn ON, and the  
command specified in the DM Area will be sent using the IOWR instruction.  
2. When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON, the completion code (DM 2001) is  
examined. If an error is found, the completion code is stored in DM 0100, and the command is re-  
executed.  
3. If the completion code of the response is normal, the Message Sent Flag will be turned ON, and the  
Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Ladder Program  
01000 (Program Start Input Bit)  
01001  
01001  
DIFU (013)  
BSET (071)  
MOVD (083)  
01001  
#0000  
DM0007  
#0012  
DM0204  
DM0200  
DM0220  
MOVD (083)  
DM0007  
#0210  
DVB (053)  
DM0205  
DM0002  
#0002  
MOVD (083)  
DM0200  
DM0008  
#0012  
CMP (020)  
DM0205  
#0000  
DM0201  
MOVD (083)  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
DM0008  
#0210  
ADB (050)  
#0001  
DM0200  
DM0200  
DM0206  
MOVD (083)  
DM0009  
#0012  
ADB (050)  
#0004  
DM0200  
DM0200  
DM0206  
MOVD (083)  
DM0000  
#0210  
BCD (024)  
DM0200  
DM0202  
DM0210  
ORW (035)  
MOVD (083)  
DM0005  
DM0210  
DM0001  
DM0220  
#0210  
DM0203  
MOVD (083)  
BSET (071)  
DM0006  
#0012  
#0000  
DM2000  
DM2009  
DM0203  
MOVD (083)  
MOV (021)  
DM0006  
#0210  
#0001  
000  
DM0204  
Converts to IOWR instruction data from the specified DM areas (DM 0000 to DM 0009).  
Clears the data storage area.  
Sets the 000 word used for shift register to 1.”  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
10112  
Master Unit: Node 0  
01001  
00002 Message Communications Enabled Flag  
MOV (021)  
CMP (020)  
#0000  
#00FE  
DM0500  
DM2001  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
DM2001  
DM0100  
#8207  
DM1000  
ASR (026)  
000  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
#D000  
DM1001  
ASR (026)  
000  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
#0064  
MOV (021)  
#0000  
DM1002  
Checks FINS end code.  
000  
If an error is found, the IOWR  
instruction is executed again. If  
the code is correct, the program  
will be terminated.  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
03001  
DM0002  
DM1003  
03000  
03001  
00000  
#2801  
DM1004  
03000  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
DM0220  
DM1005  
10112  
00000 Message Communications Enabled Flag  
ASL (025)  
000  
DM0003  
DM1006  
When the Master  
Unit No. is 0.  
IOWR (223)  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
DM0500  
DM1000  
DM0202  
DM0004  
DM1007  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
00001  
DM0203  
DM1008  
ASR (026)  
000  
ASL (025)  
000  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
DM0204  
DM1009  
Executes and checks the execution  
of IOWR instruction.  
DM0205  
DM1010  
MOV (021)  
DM0206  
DM1011  
Sets IOWR instruction.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
7-3 Special Remote I/O Programs  
7-3-1 Simple Operation Programs  
This section describes examples of simple operation programming using special remote I/O. To use  
special remote I/O, it is necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Refer to 5-3 Switching Remote I/O  
Operation and change to the special remote I/O operation.  
Once the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, Inverter operations will continue until the Program End  
Input is turned ON. The frequency (speed) reference specified in the DM Area (DM1000) of the PC is  
repeatedly set in the Inverter. The output frequency value will be repeatedly read and stored in the DM  
Area (DM 2000). The Inverter status will also be read repeatedly and stored in words (020**) allocated in  
the PC.  
If any communications error occurs, the program will stop and a stop command will be sent to the Invert-  
er. This state will continue until the Communications Fault Reset Input Bit is turned ON.  
Note Write the program so that the Inverter operation commands (01000 and 01001) will be turned  
OFF when the Fault Bit (02007) of the Inverter status turns ON, and also take appropriate coun-  
termeasures according to maintenance information in the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV High-function Gen-  
eral-purpose Inverter Users Manual.  
H Allocations  
D Inverter Control Input Word Allocation  
Word  
Function  
Forward/Stop (1: Forward) Bit  
Reverse/Stop (1: Reverse) Bit  
Multi-function Input 1 Bit  
01000  
01001  
01002  
01003  
Fault Reset Input Bit  
(Multi-function Input 2 Bit: Initial setting)  
01004  
01005  
01006  
01007  
Multi-function Input 3 Bit  
Multi-function Input 4 Bit  
Multi-function Input 5 Bit  
Multi-function Input 6 Bit  
D Inverter Status Word Allocation  
Word  
Function  
02000  
02001  
02002  
02003  
02004  
02005  
02006  
02007  
During Run Bit  
Zero Speed Bit  
Forward/Reverse (1: Reverse Operation) Bit  
Fault Reset Input Bit  
Frequency Agree 1 Bit  
Inverter Ready Bit  
Warning Bit  
Fault Bit  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
D Program-related Bits Used  
Word  
Function  
Program Start Input Bit  
00000  
00001  
00002  
00003  
00004  
01000  
00101  
00102  
00103  
00300  
00301  
00302  
00303  
03110  
Program End Input Bit  
Program Execution Flag  
Communications Error Reset Input Bit  
Inverter Stop Command Flag  
Frequency Reference Write Flag  
Control Input Write Flag  
Output Frequency Read Flag  
Inverter Status Read Flag  
Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag  
Control Input Write Completed Flag  
Output Frequency Read Completed Flag  
Inverter Status Read Completed Flag  
Communications Error Flag  
D Inverter Control Input  
Word  
Function  
DM1000  
DM2000  
Reference frequency setting  
Output frequency monitor  
D Remote I/O Allocation Areas  
I/O classification  
Word address  
15 to 8  
7 to 0  
Output  
(PC to 3G3FV  
Inverter)  
n
Register No. (leftmost bits)  
Function code (10: Write, 03:  
Read)  
n+1  
n+2  
m
Register data (leftmost bits)  
Not used  
Register No. (rightmost bits)  
Register data (rightmost bits)  
Input  
(3G3FV Inverter  
to PC)  
Register No. (leftmost bits)  
Function code (10: Write, 03:  
Read)  
m+1  
m+2  
Register data (leftmost bits)  
Not used  
Register No. (rightmost bits)  
Register data (rightmost bits)  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
H Timing Chart  
Chapter 7  
00000 (Program Start Input Bit)  
00001 (Program End Input Bit) or  
03110 (Communications Error Flag)  
00002 (Program Execution Flag)  
00100 (Frequency Reference  
Write Flag)  
00101 (Control Input Write Flag)  
00102 (Output Frequency  
Read Flag)  
00103 (Inverter Status Read Flag)  
00300 (Control Input Write  
Completed Flag)  
00301 (Frequency Reference  
Write Completed Flag)  
00302 (Output Frequency  
Read Completed Flag)  
00303 (Inverter Status Read  
Completed Flag)  
00004 (Inverter Stop  
Command Flag)  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
H Operation  
1. When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, the Program Execution Input Bit will be set to self-  
holding and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned ON. When the Frequency Refer-  
ence Write Flag is ON, the frequency reference data in DM1000 will be transferred to the Inverter.  
When the Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag is turned ON, the Frequency Reference  
Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Control Input Write Flag will be turned ON. (Bits are shifted to  
achieve this.)  
2. When the Control Input Write Flag is turned ON, the Inverter control input specified in word 010 will  
be transferred to the Inverter. When the Control Input Write Completed Flag is turned ON, the Con-  
trol Input Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Output Frequency Reference Read Flag will be  
turned ON. (Bits are shifted to achieve this.)  
3. When the Output Frequency Read Flag is turned ON, the output frequency of the Inverter will be  
read. When the Output Frequency Read Completed Flag is turned ON, the read output frequency  
will be stored in DM 2000, the Output Frequency Read Flag will be turned OFF, and the Inverter  
Status Read Flag will be turned ON. (Bits are shifted to achieve this.)  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
4. When the Inverter Status Read Flag is turned ON, the Inverter status will be read. When the Inverter  
Status Read Completed Flag is turned ON, the read Inverter status will be transferred to word 020,  
the Inverter Status Read Flag will be turned OFF, and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be  
turned ON. Setting the Frequency Reference Write Flag to ON will repeat the above steps 1 to 4.  
5. When the Program End Input Bit is turned ON, the Inverter stop command will be written in the In-  
verter. (When word m bit 7 turns ON, communications errors will be detected and the Communica-  
tions Error Flag will be turned ON and will be self-holding. While this flag remains ON, the system will  
perform the same processing as when the Program End Input Bit is turned ON. When the Commu-  
nications Error Reset Input Bit is turned ON, the self-holding state will be cleared.)  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Ladder Program  
00103  
00000  
00004  
DIFU (013)  
MOV (021)  
03000  
#0003  
DM0100  
00004  
03000  
00002  
MOV (021)  
00002  
03000  
Reads Inverter status.  
#0010  
DM0101  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
00100  
00101  
#0001  
001  
03002  
00100  
00102  
00103  
#0010  
DM0100  
ANDW (034)  
DM1000  
03002  
XFER (070)  
#FF00  
#0002  
DM0100  
n
DM0101  
ORW (035)  
DM0101  
#0001  
MOVD (083)  
DM0102  
DM0101  
#0010  
n+2  
ANDW (034)  
DM1000  
Sets frequency reference.  
00100  
#00FF  
CMP (020)  
DM0102  
#0010  
m
00101  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
#0010  
03100  
DM0100  
ANDW (034)  
m+1  
#0000  
#00FF  
DM0101  
DM1002  
ANDW (034)  
CMP (020)  
010  
Sets control input.  
#0001  
#00FF  
DM1002  
DM0102  
00102  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03101  
#0003  
DM0100  
03100  
03101  
ASL (025)  
001  
#0021  
DM0101  
00300  
Reads output frequency.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
00103  
00101  
CMP (020)  
CMP (020)  
#0003  
m
#0010  
m
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03107  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03103  
ANDW (034)  
m+1  
ANDW (034)  
m+1  
#00FF  
DM1002  
#00FF  
CMP (020)  
DM1002  
#0010  
CMP (020)  
#0000  
DM1002  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03108  
DM1002  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03107  
03108  
03104  
ANDW (034)  
m+2  
#00FF  
020  
03103  
00102  
03104  
ASL (025)  
CMP (020)  
001  
MOV (021)  
00301  
03105  
#0001  
001  
#0003  
m
00303  
00002  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
ANDW (034)  
m
#0080  
ANDW (034)  
DM1005  
m+1  
#00FF  
CMP (020)  
DM1002  
#0080  
DM1005  
CMP (020)  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
00003  
#00021  
03109  
03110  
DM1002  
03109  
03110  
03110  
00001  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03106  
03105  
03106  
ANDW (034)  
m+1  
00004  
#FF00  
DM1003  
ANDW (034)  
m+2  
#00FF  
DM1004  
ORW (035)  
DM1003  
DM1004  
DM2000  
ASL (025)  
001  
00302  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
00004  
MOV (021)  
Executes stop command.  
#0000  
001  
MOV (021)  
#0010  
DM0100  
MOV (021)  
#0000  
DM0101  
MOV (021)  
#0000  
DM0102  
XFER (070)  
#0002  
DM0100  
n
MOVD (083)  
DM0102  
#0010  
n+2  
7-3-2 Reading Parameter Data  
This programming example is designed to read the parameter data specified in the 3G3FV Inverter. To  
use special remote I/O, it is necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Refer to 5-3 Switching Re-  
mote I/O Operation and change to the special remote I/O operation.  
H Allocation  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
00000  
00002  
03000  
03001  
03005  
Read Parameter Input Bit  
Faulty Data Reset Input Bit  
Data Read Flag  
Faulty Data Flag  
Data Read Completed Flag  
Register number of the parameter to be read  
Read data  
DM 0000  
DM 0001  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
D Remote I/O Allocation Areas  
I/O classification  
Word  
15 to 8  
7 to 0  
Output  
(PC to 3G3FV  
Inverter)  
n
Register number (leftmost  
byte)  
Function code (10: Write, 03:  
Read)  
n+1  
Register data (leftmost byte)  
Register number (rightmost  
byte)  
n+2  
m
Not used.  
Register data (rightmost byte)  
Input  
(3G3FV Inverter  
to PC)  
Register number (leftmost  
byte)  
Function code (10: Write, 03:  
Read)  
m+1  
m+2  
Register data (leftmost byte)  
Register number (rightmost  
byte)  
Not used.  
Register data (rightmost byte)  
H Timing Chart  
00000 (Read Parameter Input Bit)  
03000 (Data Read Flag)  
03005 (Data Read Completed Flag)  
Send Data (Read)  
Word n to n+2 (Send Data)  
Word m to m+2 (Receive Data)  
Receive Data (Read)  
1.  
2.  
H Operation  
1. Set the register number of the parameter to be read in DM 0000. When the Read Parameter Input Bit  
is turned ON, the Data Read Flag will be turned ON and parameter reading processing will be  
executed.  
2. If the data is normally read, the read parameter register number and data will be returned by the  
Inverter. When the register number that was sent agrees with the received register number, the pa-  
rameter data will be stored in DM 0001, the Data Read Completed Flag will be turned ON and the  
Data Read Flag will be turned OFF.  
Note If the send data is faulty, word m bit 7 will be turned ON, which will turn ON the Faulty Data Flag  
and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit (00002) is turned ON.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Ladder Program  
00000 (Read Parameter Input Bit)  
03001  
03001  
DIFU (013)  
03002  
03005  
03003  
03005  
00001  
03005  
00001  
03000  
MOV (021)  
03000  
00001  
m+1  
DM0201  
MOV (021)  
BSET (071)  
m+2  
#0000  
DM0202  
DM0200  
DM0209  
ANDW (034)  
ANDW (034)  
DM0201  
#FF00  
DM0000  
#FF00  
DM0203  
DM0200  
ANDW (034)  
ORW (035)  
DM0202  
#00FF  
DM0200  
#0003  
DM0204  
DM0205  
ORW (035)  
ANDW (034)  
DM0000  
Transfers read data to  
DM 0001.  
DM0203  
DM0204  
DM0001  
#00FF  
DM0206  
00002  
Word m bit 7  
03001  
03001  
XFER (070)  
#0002  
DM0205  
n
Detects data errors.  
MOVD (083)  
Sets the function code to be  
read and register number.  
#0000  
#0010  
n+2  
03000  
CMP (020)  
DM0205  
m
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03002  
ANDW (034)  
m+1  
#00FF  
DM0208  
CMP (020)  
DM0206  
DM0208  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03003  
Confirms the completion of reading.  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
7-3-3 Writing Parameter Data  
This programming example is designed to write the parameter data in the 3G3FV Inverter. After writing  
has been completed, be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data as the Inverter op-  
eration data.  
To use special remote I/O, it will be necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Refer to 5-3 Switching  
Remote I/O Operation and change to the special remote I/O operation.  
H Allocations  
00000  
00002  
03000  
03005  
00100  
00101  
00102  
00103  
03010  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Bit  
Write Parameter Input Bit  
Faulty Data Reset Input Bit  
Data Write Flag  
Data Agree Flag (Function Code and Register No.)  
Sending Written Data Flag  
Sending Enter Command Flag  
Setting 00Function Code Flag  
Data Write Completed Flag  
Faulty Data Flag  
DM 0000  
DM 0001  
Register number of the parameter to be written  
Written data  
D Remote I/O Allocation Areas  
I/O classification  
Word  
15 to 8  
7 to 0  
Output  
(PC to 3G3FV  
Inverter)  
n
Register number (leftmost byte)  
Register data (leftmost byte)  
Not used  
Function code (10: Write, 03: Read)  
Register number (rightmost byte)  
Register data (rightmost byte)  
n+1  
n+2  
m
Input  
(3G3FV Inverter to  
PC)  
Register number (leftmost byte)  
Register data (leftmost byte)  
Not used  
Function code (10: Write, 03: Read)  
Register number (rightmost byte)  
Register data (rightmost byte)  
m+1  
m+2  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Timing Chart  
00000 (Write Parameter Input Bit)  
03000 (Data Write Flag)  
03005 (Data Agree Flag)  
00100 (Sending Written Data Flag)  
00101 (Sending Enter Command Flag)  
00102 (Sending 00Function Flag)  
00103 (Data Write Completed Flag)  
Send Data (Write) Enter Command  
Word n to n+2 (Send Data)  
00Function  
Send Data (Write) Enter Command  
00Function  
Word m to m+2 (Receive Data)  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
H Operation  
1. Set the register number of the parameter and the data to be written in DM 0000 and DM 0001 re-  
spectively. When the Write Parameter Input Bit is turned ON, the Data Write Flag will be turned ON  
and parameter writing processing will be executed.  
2. If the data is properly written, the written parameter register number and the function code will be  
returned from the Inverter. When the sent register number and the function code agree with the re-  
ceived data contents, the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the enter command.  
3. If the enter command is normally received, the register number and function code that agree with  
the enter command will be returned from the Inverter. When the sent register number and function  
code agree with the received contents, the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the function  
code 00(both the register number and function code are 0000).  
4. In the same manner, if the function code 00is normally received, the Data Agree Flag will be turned  
ON and the Data Write Completed Flag will be turned ON. When the Data Write Completed Flag  
turns ON, the Data Write Flag will turn OFF and the program will stop.  
Note 1. If the enter command remains set, data will be repeatedly written to EEPROM. Therefore, set  
the function code to 00(both the register number and function code are 0000), which per-  
forms no processing, to disable the enter command.  
Note 2. If the sent data is faulty, word m bit 7 will be turned ON, which will turn ON the Faulty Data Flag  
and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit (00002) is turned ON.  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
H Ladder Program  
00000 (Write Parameter Input Bit) 03010  
00101  
DIFU (013)  
MOV (021)  
00001  
#FF10  
00103  
03010  
00001  
03000  
DM0205  
03000  
MOV (021)  
MOV (021)  
#00FD  
00103  
DM0206  
MOV (021)  
#0000  
001  
#0000  
Sets enter command.  
DM0207  
MOV ()21)  
00001  
00100  
#0001  
001  
00102  
BSET (071)  
#0000  
BSET (071)  
Sets 00function.  
DM0205  
DM0207  
#0000  
DM0200  
DM0209  
00100  
03001  
ANDW (034)  
00101  
00102  
DM0000  
#FF00  
DM0200  
ORW (035)  
03001  
XFER (070)  
DM0200  
#0010  
#0002  
DM0205  
n
DM0205  
ANDW (034)  
DM0000  
MOVD (083)  
DM0207  
#00FF  
#0010  
n+2  
DM0201  
ANDW (034)  
DM0001  
#FF00  
(Continued on the next page.)  
DM0202  
ORW (035)  
DM0201  
DM0202  
DM0206  
ANDW (034)  
DM0001  
Sets write data.  
#00FF  
DM0207  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Programs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs)  
Chapter 7  
(From previous page.)  
03001  
CMP (020)  
DM0205  
m
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03002  
ANDW (034)  
m+1  
#00FF  
DM0208  
ANDW (034)  
DM0206  
#00FF  
DM0209  
CMP (020)  
DM0208  
DM0209  
25506 (Equals Flag)  
03003  
03002  
03003  
03005  
ASL (025)  
001  
00002  
Word m bit 7  
03010  
03010  
MOV (021)  
BSET (071)  
#0000  
001  
Data error processing.  
#0000  
DM0205  
DM0207  
XFER (070)  
#0002  
DM0205  
n
MOVD (083)  
DM0207  
#0010  
n+2  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Chapter 8  
Appendices  
8-1 Specifications  
8-2 Objects  
8-3 CompoBus/D Communications Response Time  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
8-1 Specifications  
Item  
Model  
Specifications  
3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN  
Remote I/O  
Basic remote I/O: Allocated 2 input and 2 output words.  
Standard remote I/O (default setting): Allocated 2 input and 2 output  
words.  
Special remote I/O: Allocated 3 input and 3 output words.  
Note 1. The user can select from among these three types of remote  
I/O.  
Note 2. Basic and standard remote I/O are compatible with DeviceNet.  
Special remote I/O is applicable only to this product and is not  
compatible with DeviceNet.  
Explicit messages  
A maximum of 32 bytes of data can be sent or received.  
Note Explicit messages are applicable to the AC/DC drive profile.  
Communications power supply  
specifications  
11 to 25 VDC (20 mA max.)  
Internal circuit power supply  
Operating location  
Operating ambient temperature  
Operating ambient humidity  
Storage temperature  
Area  
Provided from 3G3FV Inverter.  
Indoors (with no corrosive gases, oil mist, metallic particles, etc.)  
10 to 45°C  
90% RH max. (with no condensation)  
20 to 60°C  
1,000 m max.  
Weight  
150 g max.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
8-2 Objects  
There are eight types of object:  
Identify objects (identification information): Class 01 hex  
Message router objects: Class 02 hex  
DeviceNet objects: Class 03 hex  
Assembly objects: Class 04 hex  
DeviceNet connection objects: Class 05 hex  
Motor data objects: Class 28  
Control supervisor objects: Class 29 hex  
AC/DC drive objects: Class 2A hex  
For details on motor data objects, control supervisor objects, and AC/DC drive objects, refer to 5-2-5  
Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex through 5-2-7 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex.  
8-2-1 Identify Objects (Identification Information): Class 01 Hex  
Identify objects are objects that provide CompoBus/D product information. All of this information is  
read-only.  
H Support Service Codes  
Service Code No. (Hex)  
Service  
0E  
05  
Get attribute single  
Reset (return to initial status)  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
H Object Details  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
(Hex)  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
No  
Size  
Word  
00  
01  
01  
Object Software  
Revision  
Indicates class 01 software ---  
revisions. The revision  
value is advanced  
whenever there is a  
change.  
0001  
01  
02  
Vender ID  
Indicates the makers code. ---  
002F  
0002  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Word  
Word  
OMRON: 47 (2F hex)  
Device Type  
Indicates the DeviceNet  
profile classification. The  
Inverter corresponds to the  
AC/DC Drive.  
---  
Master Unit: 0  
AC/DC Drive: 2  
03  
Product Code  
Assigned to each series by ---  
each maker.  
0034  
Yes  
No  
Word  
CompoBus/D  
Communications Card: 52  
(34 hex)  
04  
05  
Revision  
Status  
Indicates overall software  
revisions for the  
CompoBus/D  
---  
---  
01.00  
0000  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Byte × 2  
Communications Card.  
Indicates the  
communications status of  
the CompoBus/D  
Word  
Communications Card.  
(See details below.)  
06  
Serial Number  
Indicates the product serial ---  
number of the CompoBus/D  
Communications Card.  
Depends Yes  
on  
product.  
No  
Long  
(60000000 hex onwards)  
07  
08  
Product Number  
State  
Indicates product model  
number.  
---  
Number Yes  
shown at  
left.  
No  
No  
String  
Byte  
3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN  
Indicates Inverter status.  
3 hex: Inverter ready  
---  
03  
Yes  
D Status Details  
Bit  
Item  
Content  
0
Connection  
Not used.  
0: Not connected.  
1: Master/Slave connected.  
1
2
---  
Configuration  
0: Data never changed.  
1: Data other than default.  
3 to 15  
Not used.  
---  
Note Bits that are not used are all zeros.  
8-2-2 Message Router Objects: Class 02 Hex  
Message router objects have the function of distributing CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) communications  
data. Message and remote I/O operations, and so on, must pass through these objects to be distributed.  
Message router objects themselves are involved in internal processing only and do not have data to be  
exchanged externally.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
H Support Service Code  
Service Code No. (Hex)  
Service  
0E  
Get attribute single  
H Object Details  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
(Hex)  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
No  
Size  
Word  
00  
01  
Object Software  
Revision  
Indicates class 02 software ---  
revisions. The revision  
value is advanced  
0001  
whenever there is a  
change.  
8-2-3 DeviceNet Objects: Class 03 Hex  
DeviceNet objects are objects related to CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) communications information and  
operations.  
H Support Service Code  
Service Code No. (Hex)  
Service  
0E  
10  
Get attribute single  
Set attribute single  
H Object Details  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
(Hex)  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
No  
Size  
Word  
00  
01  
Object Software  
Revision  
Indicates class 03 software ---  
revisions. The revision  
value is advanced  
0001  
whenever there is a  
change.  
01  
01  
MAC ID  
Indicates the set value of  
the communications node  
address. It is read-only  
because the setting is  
made by the external  
setting switch.  
---  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
02  
05  
Baud Rate  
Indicates the baud rate. It is ---  
write-protected because the  
setting is made by the  
00  
external setting switch.  
00: 125 Kbps  
01: 250 Kbps  
02: 500 Kbps  
Allocation Information  
Indicates DeviceNet  
---  
0000  
Yes  
No  
Byte × 2  
communications connection  
information. Used to check  
whether connection is  
already made.  
See details below.  
Cannot be written for ex-  
plicit messages. (Error is  
returned.)  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
D Allocation Information Details  
Byte  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: Remote I/O 1: Explicit  
connection  
status  
message  
connection  
status  
1
0
0
Node address (MAC ID) of Master connected for DeviceNet communications.  
Note The Master Unit automatically writes allocation information when the communications connec-  
tion is completed. After the Master Unit has written the information, writing is prohibited.  
8-2-4 Assembly Objects: Class 04 Hex  
Assembly objects are objects related to remote I/O operations. Remote I/O operations are configured  
with these objects for communications.  
H Support Service Codes  
Service Code No. (Hex)  
Service  
0E  
10  
Get attribute single  
Set attribute single  
H Object Details  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
(Hex)  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
No  
Size  
Word  
00  
01  
Object Software  
Revision  
Indicates class 04 software ---  
revisions. The revision  
value is advanced  
0001  
whenever there is a  
change.  
14  
15  
03  
03  
Remote I/O data  
Remote I/O data  
Operation is the same as  
for basic remote I/O  
(output).  
See  
note 1.  
00. 00.  
00. 00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Byte × 4  
Operation is the same as  
for standard remote I/O  
(output).  
See  
note 1.  
00. 00.  
00. 00  
Byte × 4  
46  
47  
03  
03  
Remote I/O data  
Remote I/O data  
Operation is the same as  
for basic remote I/O (input).  
---  
---  
00. 00.  
00. 00  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Byte × 4  
Operation is the same as  
for standard remote I/O  
(input).  
00. 00.  
00. 00  
Byte × 4  
64  
96  
03  
03  
Remote I/O data  
Remote I/O data  
Operation is the same as  
for special remote I/O  
(output).  
See  
note 1.  
00. 00.  
00. 00.  
00  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Byte × 5  
Operation is the same as  
for special remote I/O  
(input).  
---  
00. 00.  
00. 00.  
00  
Byte × 5  
Note 1. The setting ranges are the same as the respective remote I/O setting ranges.  
Note 2. The remote I/O operations are the same as those explained in 5-1 Remote I/O and 5-3 Special  
Remote I/O Operation.  
Note 3. Remote I/O can be performed by means of message communications. When a normal re-  
mote I/O communications connection is established, however, the message communications  
cannot be used for that purpose. Even if an attempt is made to use message communications,  
they will be overwritten by remote I/O inputs.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
8-2-5 DeviceNet Connection Objects: Class 05 Hex  
DeviceNet connection objects are objects related to information and operations involving CompoBus/D  
(DeviceNet) communications connections. The Master Unit uses the information and operations of  
these objects to execute the initial processing for communications.  
H Support Service Codes  
Service Code No. (Hex)  
Service  
0E  
10  
Get attribute single  
Set attribute single  
H Object Details  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
(Hex)  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
No  
Size  
Word  
00  
01  
Object Software  
Revision  
Indicates class 05 software ---  
revisions. The revision  
value is advanced  
0001  
whenever there is a  
change.  
01  
Explicit  
message  
01  
State  
Indicates the status of this  
object (instance).  
---  
Must be Yes  
03”  
when  
commu-  
nications  
are es-  
tab-  
No  
Byte  
00: Does not exist in  
network, or is not ready.  
01: In network state, waiting  
for connection event from  
Master Unit.  
02: Waiting for connection  
ID (attribute) writing.  
03: Connection completed.  
04: Timeout  
lished.  
02  
03  
Instance type  
Indicates the type of object  
(instance).  
---  
---  
00  
83  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
00: Explicit message  
01: Remote I/O  
Transport class trigger  
Indicates the  
communications  
configuration for the  
CompoBus/D  
Communications Card.  
Indicates the label used for  
the communications header  
for the CompoBus/D  
04  
05  
Produced connection ID  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Word  
Word  
Communications Card.  
Consumed connection  
ID  
Note: These are set when  
the communications  
connection is made.  
06  
Initial comm  
characteristics  
Indicates the  
---  
21  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
communications  
configuration for the  
CompoBus/D  
Communications Card.  
07  
08  
Produced connection  
size  
Indicates the maximum  
number of bytes for  
transmission.  
---  
---  
0020  
0020  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Word  
Word  
Consumed connection  
size  
Indicates the maximum  
number of bytes for  
reception.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
(Hex)  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
Yes  
Size  
Word  
01  
09  
Expected packet rate  
Indicates the length of the  
internal processing timeout 65,535  
when a communications  
request is received.  
Incremented by 10-ms  
units.  
0 to  
09C4  
(2,500  
ms)  
Explicit  
message  
(ms)  
0C  
Watchdog time-out  
action  
Indicates the action for  
internal processing timeout  
related to communications.  
---  
01  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
00: Retain timeout status  
(until reset or cleared).  
01: Cut connection  
automatically.  
02: Operate again with  
same connection as is.  
0D  
0E  
Produced connection  
path length  
Indicates number of bytes  
of data for produced  
connection path. (No data  
for explicit messages.)  
---  
---  
0000  
---  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Word  
Array  
Produced connection  
path  
Indicates the data for  
defining the application  
object for sending this  
object (instance). (No data  
for explicit messages.)  
0F  
10  
Consumed connection  
path length  
Indicates the number of  
bytes of data for the  
consumed connection path.  
(No data for explicit  
messages.)  
---  
---  
0000  
---  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Word  
Array  
Consumed connection  
path  
Indicates the data for  
defining the application  
object for receiving this  
object (instance). (No data  
for explicit messages.)  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
(Hex)  
Read  
Write  
No  
Size  
Byte  
02  
01  
State  
Indicates the status of this  
object (instance).  
---  
Must be Yes  
03”  
when  
commu-  
nications  
are es-  
tab-  
Remote  
I/O  
00: Does not exist in  
network, or is not ready.  
01: In network state, waiting  
for connection event from  
Master Unit.  
02: Waiting for connection  
ID (attribute) writing.  
03: Connection completed.  
04: Timeout  
lished.  
02  
03  
Instance type  
Indicates the type of object  
(instance).  
---  
---  
01  
82  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Byte  
Byte  
00: Explicit message  
01: Remote I/O  
Transport class trigger  
Indicates the  
communications  
configuration for the  
CompoBus/D  
Communications Card.  
Indicates the label used for  
the communications header  
for the CompoBus/D  
04  
05  
Produced connection ID  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Word  
Word  
Communications Card.  
Consumed connection  
ID  
Note: These are set when  
the communications  
connection is made.  
06  
Initial comm  
characteristics  
Indicates the  
---  
01  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
communications  
configuration for the  
CompoBus/D  
Communications Card.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
Instance Attribute  
Name  
Content  
Setting  
range  
Default  
(Hex)  
Read  
Yes  
Write  
No  
Size  
Word  
02  
07  
08  
09  
Produced connection  
size  
Indicates the maximum  
number of bytes for  
transmission.  
---  
0004  
Remote  
I/O  
Consumed connection  
size  
Indicates the maximum  
number of bytes for  
reception.  
---  
0004  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Word  
Word  
Expected packet rate  
Indicates the length of the  
0 to  
0000  
Yes  
internal processing timeout 65,535  
(0 ms)  
when a communications  
request is received.  
(ms)  
0C  
Watchdog time-out  
action  
Indicates the action for  
internal processing timeout  
related to communications.  
---  
01  
Yes  
No  
Byte  
00: Retain timeout status  
(until reset or cleared).  
01: Cut connection  
automatically.  
02: Operate again with  
same connection as is.  
0D  
0E  
Produced connection  
path length  
Indicates number of bytes  
of data for produced  
connection path.  
---  
---  
0003  
Yes  
No  
No  
Word  
Array  
Produced connection  
path  
Indicates the data for  
defining the application  
object for sending this  
object (instance).  
62 34 37 Yes  
Note: Has a function for  
switching the CompoBus/D  
Communication Cards  
remote I/O operation.  
0F  
10  
Consumed connection  
path length  
Indicates the number of  
bytes of data for the  
consumed connection path.  
---  
---  
0003  
Yes  
No  
No  
Word  
Array  
Consumed connection  
path  
Indicates the data for  
defining the application  
object for receiving this  
object (instance).  
62 31 35 Yes  
Note: Has a function for  
switching the CompoBus/D  
Communication Cards  
remote I/O operation.  
Note Receptionmeans output (3G3FV to SYSMAC PC), and transmissionmeans input (SYSMAC  
PC to 3G3FV).  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
8-3 CompoBus/D Communications Response Time  
This section describes communications response time when OMRON Master and Slave Units are be-  
ing used. Use this section for reference when planning I/O timing. The equations provided here are valid  
under the following conditions:  
The Master Unit is operating with the scan list enabled.  
All of the required Slaves are participating in communications.  
No errors are being indicated at the Master Unit  
Messages are not being produced in the network (from another companys configurator, for example).  
H Communications Cycle Time  
D One Master in Network  
The following equations show the communications cycle time (TRM) when there is only one Master in  
the network. If the calculation result is less than 2 ms, the communications cycle time (TRM) will be con-  
sidered as 2 ms.  
T
RM = Σ (0.016 × TB × SOUT1 + 0.11 × TB + 0.07)  
+ Σ (0.016 × TB × SIN1 + 0.06 × TB + 0.05)  
+ Σ {0.016 × TB × (SOUT2 + SIN2) + 0.11 × TB + 0.07}  
+ 0.11 × TB + 0.65  
+ 0.22 × TB (number of message nodes)  
S
OUT1 : The number of Output Slave output words  
SIN1 The number of Input Slave input words  
SOUT2 : The number of Mixed I/O Slave output words  
:
SIN2  
TB :  
:
The number of Mixed I/O Slave input words  
The baud rate factor  
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)  
(Varies depending on the baud rate)  
D More than One Master in Network  
Calculate the communications cycle time according to the above equation for the Slaves of each Master  
Unit. The communications cycle time for the entire network is the sum of communications cycle times  
for each Master Unit.  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Chapter 8  
H I/O Response Time of Inverter  
The following shows processing time between the Inverter and the CompoBus/D Communications  
Card.  
DP-RAM processing time between the Inverter and CompoBus/D Communications Card: 5 ms  
Inverter input scanning: 5 ms (read twice)  
Inverter output scanning: 5 ms  
Inverter parameters scanning: 20 ms  
Inverter I/O response time  
Ladder program cycle time  
Communications cycle time  
DP-RAM processing time: 5 ms  
Inverter I/O scanning  
15 ms  
5 ms  
Inverter internal processing  
Maximum input response  
Maximum output response  
Note 1. The internal processing time varies depending on the controls to be executed.  
Note 2. Input scanning for parameter reading or writing requires 20 ms.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
connection objects, 5-25  
A-B  
connections, methods, 2-2  
AC/DC drive objects, 5-16, 5-20  
details, 5-20  
constants  
initialize mode, 5-39  
program mode, 5-39  
alarms, 5-34  
allocation areas, 1-11  
fixed allocation, 4-5  
free allocation, 4-9  
Control From Net Bit, 7-2  
Control Input Write Completed Flag, 7-14  
Control Input Write Flag, 7-14  
control monitor objects, details, 5-18  
control supervisor objects, 5-16, 5-17  
CPF errors, 5-34  
assembly objects, 5-16  
details, 8-6  
service codes, 8-6  
At Frequency Bit, 7-2, 7-13  
basic remote I/O  
inputs, 5-6  
outputs, 5-6  
CRC check, 1-10  
baud rate, 1-10  
restrictions, 2-4  
settings, 3-4  
crimp terminals, 3-7  
current capacity, 2-9  
C
D
communications  
cable shielding, 2-16  
distance, 2-4  
daisy-chain drop lines, 1-6  
explicit messages, 1-3  
fault processing, 7-5–7-12  
flags, 5-12  
DeviceNet connection objects, 5-16  
details, 8-7  
service codes, 8-7  
functions, 1-3  
line noise, 2-15  
DeviceNet objects, 5-16  
allocations, 8-6  
details, 8-5  
power supply, 1-10, 2-2, 2-6  
noise prevention, 2-16  
suspension, 2-17  
service codes, 8-5  
settings, 4-14  
drop lines, 2-2, 2-3  
branching patterns, 2-3  
daisy-chain, 1-6  
specifications, 1-10  
with Configurator, 1-11  
with SYSMAC PCs, 1-2, 1-11  
without Configurator, 1-11  
maximum length, 1-10, 2-4  
communications data  
reference examples, 5-23  
setting examples, 5-22  
During Forward Run Input Bit, 7-2  
During Reverse Run Input Bit, 7-2  
During Run Bit, 7-13  
Communications Error Flag, 7-14  
Communications Error Reset Input Bit, 7-14  
Communications Fault Reset Input Bit, 7-13  
communications flags, 5-15  
E
communications line errors, operation indicators, 6-2  
EEPROM, 6-7  
Configurator, 1-5, 1-6  
3G8E2-DRM21, 1-9  
3G8F5-DRM21, 1-9  
communications, 1-11  
overview, 1-8  
Equals Flag, 5-12  
error codes, 5-38  
Error Flag, 5-12  
specifications, 1-9  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
errors  
communications line, 6-2  
explicit messages, 6-5  
setup  
I/O Area Overlap, 4-6  
I/O Area Range Violation, 4-6  
special remote I/O, 6-6  
verification, 4-6  
G-I  
grounding, 2-15  
Communications Card, 2-15  
network, 2-15  
I/O Area Overlap, 4-6  
I/O Area Range Violation, 4-6  
I/O power supply, 2-2  
Slave I/O Size Differs, 4-7  
identify objects, 5-16  
details, 8-4  
service codes, 8-3  
status, 8-4  
explicit messages, 1-3, 1-5  
errors, 6-5  
overview, 5-9  
transmission, 5-9  
installation  
Communications Card, 3-5  
precautions, 3-5  
T-branch Tap, 3-8  
T-branch Tap Terminating Resistor, 3-10  
Terminating Resistor, 3-10  
F
instruction set  
CMND, 7-8  
fault, Inverter, 6-7  
CMND(194), 5-13  
IOWR, 5-9, 7-8  
Fault Bit, 7-3, 7-6, 7-13  
fault codes, 5-19  
Interface Unit, 1-9  
internal circuit power supply, 2-2  
Fault Flag, 7-2, 7-6  
Fault Read Flag, 7-6  
Fault Reset Input Bit, 7-2, 7-13  
faults, 5-33  
Inverter, 1-10  
allocated words, 5-4  
control input, 7-14  
word allocation, 7-13  
fault detection, 6-7  
fault processing, 7-57-12  
fault status, 6-7  
FINS commands, 1-5, 7-8  
memory data backup, 6-7  
monitoring, 5-35  
monitoring function, 5-37  
monitoring functions, 5-32  
outputs, 5-31  
fixed allocation, 1-7  
allocation areas, 4-5  
application procedure, 4-7  
communications, 1-11  
example, 4-7  
run commands, 4-134-16, 5-4, 5-31  
settings, 4-13  
without Configurator, 4-2  
status, 5-32  
word allocation, 7-13  
wiring, 3-7  
Forward Input Bit, 7-2  
Forward/Reverse Bit, 7-13  
Forward/Stop Bit, 7-2  
Inverter Ready Bit, 7-2, 7-13  
Inverter Status Read Completed Flag, 7-14  
Inverter Status Read Flag, 7-14  
Inverter Stop Command Flag, 7-14  
ISA Board, 1-9  
free allocation, 1-6, 1-8  
allocation areas, 4-9  
application procedure, 4-11  
communications, 1-11  
example, 4-11  
M
restrictions, 4-3, 4-10  
with Configurator, 4-2  
memory data backup, 6-7  
frequency reference  
ladder program, 7-4  
selection, 4-134-16  
settings, 4-15, 7-14  
message communications, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5, 1-7  
command format, 5-15  
explicit messages, 5-8  
FINS messages, 5-8  
operations, 5-8  
overview, 5-8  
Frequency Reference Input Bit, 7-2  
programming, 7-5  
Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag, 7-14  
Frequency Reference Write Flag, 7-14  
functions, 1-2  
response format, 5-16  
response read timing, 5-14  
responses, 5-15  
timing, 5-11, 5-12, 5-14  
I-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Message Communications Enabled Flag, 5-11, 5-12, 7-6, 7-10  
Message Communications Status Flag, 5-12  
Message Execution Flag, 7-10  
P
parameter constants, 5-28  
application, 5-39  
command-related, 5-43  
external terminal functions, 5-47  
motor constants, 5-43  
operators, 5-50  
message router objects, 5-16  
details, 8-5  
service codes, 8-5  
Message Sent Flag, 7-10  
options, 5-46  
program mode, 5-39  
protective functions, 5-48  
reading/writing, 5-39  
tuning, 5-41  
message transmission, 5-13  
motor constant objects, details, 5-17  
motor data objects, 5-16  
parameter objects, 5-24  
PMCIA Card, 1-9  
mounting procedure, 3-5  
multi-drop trunk lines, 1-6  
Multi-function Input Bit, 7-13  
multi-layer network, 1-5  
power supply  
calculating location, 2-9  
dual, 2-14  
location, 2-7  
multiple, 2-13  
multi-vendor network, 1-3, 1-5, 1-7  
noise prevention, 2-16  
Power Supply Tap, 2-6  
configuration, 2-13  
internal circuitry, 2-13  
N
Net Control, 5-4  
Program End Input, 7-13  
Net Control Bit, 7-2  
Program End Input Bit, 7-14  
Program Execution Flag, 7-14  
Program Start Input Bit, 7-10, 7-13, 7-14  
Net Reference, 5-4  
Net Reference Bit, 7-2  
Programmable Controller  
C200HS, 1-11  
C200HX/HG/HE, 1-11  
CV Series, 1-11  
Network Communications Enabled Flag, 5-14  
Network Communications Error Flag, 5-15  
network configuration, 1-5  
components, 2-2  
programming  
node location, 2-11  
overview, 2-2  
bits, 7-14  
reading data, 7-8  
power supply location, 2-9  
restrictions, 2-4  
reading parameter data, 7-19  
writing data, 7-8  
writing parameter data, 7-22  
node addresses, 3-4  
setting pins, 3-4  
noise prevention  
R
communications power supply, 2-16  
peripheral devices, 2-18  
wiring, 2-17  
Reference From Net Bit, 7-2  
register allocation, 5-30  
nomenclature, 3-2  
remote I/O  
allocation areas, 7-14, 7-20, 7-22  
basic, 5-6  
communications, 1-2, 1-3, 1-5, 1-7  
fixed allocation, 4-4  
free allocation, 1-6, 1-8, 4-4  
initial settings, 5-3  
special, 5-7, 5-27  
errors, 6-6  
programming, 7-13  
standard, 5-3, 5-6  
O
objects, types, 8-3  
operation indicators, 3-3, 6-2  
Operator, status, 5-32  
output frequency monitor, 7-14  
Output Frequency Read Completed Flag, 7-14  
Output Frequency Read Flag, 7-14  
programming, 7-2  
switching operations, 5-24  
restrictions, 5-25  
I-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Reset Input Bit, 7-6  
system configuration, 1-7  
example, 1-5  
fixed allocation, 1-7  
free allocation, 1-8  
Reverse Input Bit, 7-2  
Reverse/Stop Bit, 7-2  
with Configurator, 1-8  
without Configurator, 1-7  
rotational speed monitor data, 5-5  
rotational speed reference data, 5-5, 7-2  
T
S
T-branch multi-drop lines, 1-6  
scan lists, 4-3  
application, 4-4  
disabled, 4-5  
enabled, 4-5  
T-branch Tap, 2-5  
DCN1-1C, 3-9  
DCN1-3C, 3-9  
installation, 3-8  
Sending Message Flag, 7-6, 7-10  
Slave I/O Size Differs, 4-7  
special 5-wire cables, 1-10  
T-branch Tap Terminating Resistor, 3-10  
Terminal Block, 3-2  
wiring, 3-7  
Terminal-block Terminating Resistor, 2-2  
special remote I/O  
allocated words, 5-27  
communications timing, 5-29  
errors, 6-6  
function codes, 5-27  
inputs, 5-7  
Terminating Resistor, 2-2  
connection, 3-10  
connections, 2-5  
Thick Cable, 1-10, 2-10  
maximum length, 2-4  
outputs, 5-7  
overview, 5-27  
programming, 7-13  
responses, 5-29  
Thin Cable, 1-10, 2-10  
maximum length, 2-4  
trunk lines, 2-2, 2-3  
specifications  
branching patterns, 2-3  
communications, 1-10  
Configurator, 1-9  
DeviceNet, 1-3, 1-5, 1-7  
W-Z  
speed reference, 5-5  
Warning Bit, 7-13  
standard remote I/O  
inputs, 5-7  
wiring  
outputs, 5-6  
programming, 7-2  
communications cables, 3-6  
Inverter, 3-7  
precautions, 3-5  
preparations, 3-6  
Terminal Block, 3-7  
startup procedure, 4-16  
status  
alarms, 5-34  
word allocations  
Inverter control input, 7-13  
Inverter status, 7-13  
overview, 4-2  
SYSDRIVE 3G3FV-series Inverters, 5-4  
CPF errors, 5-34  
faults, 5-33  
Inverter, 5-32  
operation, 5-36  
Operator, 5-32  
output terminal, 5-36  
Zero Speed Bit, 7-13  
I-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Revision History  
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.  
Cat. No. I525-E1-1  
Revision code  
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the  
previous version.  
Revision code  
Date  
Revised content  
1
June 1998  
Original production  
R-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Milwaukee Drill 0627 20 User Manual
National Instruments Switch NI 78xxR User Manual
Nikon GPS Receiver GP N100 User Manual
Novatel GPS Receiver KV1 User Manual
Oreck Vacuum Cleaner DTX 1400A User Manual
Oster Toaster TSSTTRWF2S User Manual
Palsonic DVD Player DVD7500 User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Telephone KX TG6811BX User Manual
Panasonic Telephone KX T7130 User Manual
Patton electronic Network Card 3086 User Manual